![B 66102e - 10 - Fanuc [PDF]](https://pdfs.asia/img/200x200/b-66102e-10-fanuc.jpg)
9 0 1 MB
For Personal Computer
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B-66102E/10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as ”impossible”.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
B–66102E/07
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete s–1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10
PREFACE
PREFACE
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are : Product Name
Abbreviations
FANUC Series 0–MODEL A, B, C
0–A/B/C
Series 0–A/B/C
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL A
0i–A
Series 0i–A
FANUC Series 15–MODEL A
15–A
FANUC Series 150–MODEL A
150–A
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B
15–B
FANUC Series 150–MODEL B
150–B
FANUC Series 15i–MA
15i–MA
FANUC Series 150i–MA
150i–MA
FANUC Series 16–MODEL A
16–A
FANUC Series 16–MODEL B
16–B
FANUC Series 160–MODEL B
160–B
FANUC Series 16–MODEL C
16–C
FANUC Series 160–MODEL C
160–C
FANUC Series 16i–A
16i–A
FANUC Series 160i–A
160i–A
FANUC Series 16i–B
16i–B
FANUC Series 160i–B
160i–B
FANUC Series 18–MODEL A
18–A
FANUC Series 18–MODEL B
18–B
FANUC Series 180–MODEL B
180–B
FANUC Series 18–MODEL C
18–C
FANUC Series 180–MODEL C
180–C
FANUC Series 18i–A
18i–A
FANUC Series 180i–A
180i–A
FANUC Series 18i–B
18i–B
FANUC Series 180i–B
180i–B
Series 0
Series 15–A
Series 15–B
Series 15
Series 15i–A Series 16–A Series 16–B
Series 16–C
Series 16
Series 16i–A
Series 16i–B Series 18–A Series 18–B
Series 18–C
Series 18
Series 18i–A
Series 18i–B
FANUC Series 20
Series 20
FANUC Series 20i
Series 20i
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete p–1
Series 20
PREFACE
B–66102E/10
Product Name FANUC Series 21–TA
Abbreviations 21–TA
FANUC Series 21–TB
21–TB
FANUC Series 210–TB
210–TB
FANUC Series 21–MB
21–MB
FANUC Series 210–MB
210–MB
FANUC Series 21i–A
21i–A
FANUC Series 210i–A
210i–A
FANUC Series 21i–B
21i–B
FANUC Series 210i–B
210i–B
Series 21–A
*1 Series 21–B Series 21 Series 21i–A
Series 21i–B
*1 The Series 21–TB is available in two models: control unit A and control unit B. The manual may refer to these models as the 21–TB (controller A) or 21–TB (controller B) in those cases where their functions differ.
Other manufacturers’ products referred to in this manual
IBM and PC–DOS are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. : MS–DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft corporation. All other product names identified throughout this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. :
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete p–2
Table of Contents
B–66102E/10
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.1
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1.2
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
3.1
INSTALLING THE SYSTEM FROM THE FANUC MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
INSTALLING THE EXECUTOR FILE FROM THE FANUC MACRO LIBRARY FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
3.3
PATH SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
3.4
COMPILER SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.5
SPECIFYING ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
3.2
3.5.1 3.5.2
Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 12
4. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
4.1
MACRO COMPILER (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
4.2
MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
4.3
ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (CNC) (FOR SERIES 16/18/20/21T–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
4.4
ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC PMC WRITER/FANUC FA WRITER) (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . .
23
4.5
SERIAL INTERFACE UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
4.5.1 4.5.2
4.6
Macro Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24 24
ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC FA WRITER, GP–IB INTERFACE) (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
CONVERSION TO A MEMORY CARD FORMAT (MMCARD) (THIS FUNCTION IS USED IN THE SERIES 15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21–B/16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/ 16i–B/18i–B/21i–B/0i–A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
6. RS–232–C INTERFACE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
7. GP–IB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . . .
34
8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
4.7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] c–1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Table of Contents
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) .
39
B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC SERIES 16/18 SUPER CAP M/SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . .
79
E.1 E.2
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
E.2.1 E.2.2 E.2.3 E.2.4 E.2.5
E.3
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Conversion List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERSION OF TABLE DATA WITH THE MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.3.1 E.3.2 E.3.3
81 81 81 82 82
83
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83 83 83
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/ SUPER CAP II T WITH SERIES 16i/18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
F.1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
F.2
DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
F.3
CAP CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
USER MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
F.4
F.4.1 F.4.2 F.4.3 F.4.4 F.4.5
F.5 F.6
88 88 89 89 89
RESTRICTIONS IMPOSED ON THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
F.6.1 F.6.2
F.7
Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Developing a User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring the User Module to F–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.7.1 F.7.2
91 92
94
Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94 95
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
G.1
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.1.1 G.1.2
G.2
Starting the BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System File and User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.2.1 G.2.2
System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] c–2 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
98 98 99
100 101 104
Table of Contents
B–66102E/10
G.2.3 G.2.4 G.2.5 G.2.6 G.2.7 G.2.8
System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106 108 110 112 113 114
G.3
ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
G.4
SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
G.4.1 G.4.2 G.4.3 G.4.4
G.5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.5.1
Determining the Cause of the No–space State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118 118 119 119
120 120
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16i/18i/21i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 H.1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H.1.1 H.1.2 H.1.3
H.2
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H.2.1 H.2.2 H.2.3 H.2.4 H.2.5 H.2.6 H.2.7 H.2.8
H.3
Starting the Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Files and User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot Slot Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Basic System Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123 123 124 124
125 126 129 131 132 134 137 138 139
140
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, SERIES 16i/18i/21i–A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 I.1
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
I.2
PROCESSING BY P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
I.2.1 I.2.2 I.2.3 I.2.4 I.2.5 I.2.6 I.2.7 I.2.8
Starting the P-code Loader Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Initialization Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Start Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading End Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145 146 147 148 149 152 153 155
I.3
PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
I.4
ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
J. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 J.1 J.2
IPL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
PROCESSING FLOW FOR THE P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
J.2.1 J.2.2 J.2.3
RAM Initializing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] c–3 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
162 163 163
Table of Contents
J.2.4 J.2.5 J.2.6 J.2.7
B–66102E/10
Loading End Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164 166 167 168
J.3
PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
J.4
ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 15–B/15i–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 K.1
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
K.2
MEMORY CARD SPECIFICATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
K.3
STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
K.4
REGISTERING A MEM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A MEMORY CARD, INTO F–ROM . .
178
K.5
SAVING A MEM–FORMAT FILE FROM F–ROM TO A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
K.6
REGISTERING A ROM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A ROM CASSETTE, INTO F–ROM . .
184
K.7
TYPES OF FILES IN F–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 M. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 M.1
SERIES 15i COMPILE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
M.2
PARAMETERS OTHER THAN SERIES 15i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
M.2.1 M.2.2
Compile Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executer Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203 210
N. SUPER CAP T/SUPER CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 N.1
SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
N.2
COMPILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
N.3
LINKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
N.4
WRITE TO THE MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
N.5
LOADING TO FLASH ROM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
217
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] c–4 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1. GENERAL
B–66102E/10
1
GENERAL
The MACRO Compiler/Executor function stores programs created using custom macros (macro programs) in ROM so that machine tool builders can implement their own conversational screens. The FANUC MACRO Compiler is a macro compiler utility to implement the MACRO Compiler/Executor function on personal computers available on the market. The FANUC MACRO Compiler is applicable to the following CNC systems: 1) Series 0 2) Series 15 3) Series 16 4) Series 18 5) Series 20 6) Series 21 This manual describes the procedure to store macro programs in ROM by using the macro compiler utility. For the syntax rule for creating macro programs, refer to the manuals listed below. 1) FANUC Series 0/0-Mate Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B-61393E-1) 2) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B-61213E-1) 3) FANUC Series 15–MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro executor) (B–62073E–2) 4) FANUC Series 0i/16/18/20/21 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B-61803E-1) 5) FANUC Series 15i–MODEL A Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro executor) (B–63323EN–2)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 1
1. GENERAL
B–66102E/10
1.1 FEATURES
(1) Macro programs can be edited using a commercially available screen editor that operates under the MS-DOS environment. (2) The symbolic macro compiler function allows macro programs to be coded in symbolic format, and also allows comments to be coded. (3) A program that references macro variables in array format can be created. (4) Compile list output makes macro program development, debugging, and maintenance much easier. (5) A linker (linkage editing) function is employed which allows partial compilation and also facilitates the development and maintenance of macro programs common to several models. (6) The macro compiler utility, used with the CNC executor RAM operation function, can transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC system. This capability allows macro programs to be developed and debugged without writing ROM. (7) Linker output (ROM-format file) operation is separated from writing to a macro ROM by the ROM file transmitter with the FANUC PMC-Writer/FA-Writer. With this feature, the same macro ROM can be created at any time by preserving ROM-format files. (8) A ROM file transmitter function based on the GP-IB interface allows connection to the FANUC FA Writer for high-speed writing to a macro ROM verification.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 2
1. GENERAL
B–66102E/10
1.2 OVERVIEW
The FANUC MACRO Compiler/Executor function enables the FANUC CNC users to develop their own macro programs in a macro language, store the macro programs in ROM as a macro ROM by using the macro compiler, and execute the macro programs with the macro executor function of the FANUC CNC systems. (See the conceptual diagram on the next page.) The macro compiler utility enables macro program development, compilation, and writing to a macro ROM on a personal computer operating under the MS-DOS or PC-DOS. The macro compiler utility functions are listed below. (1) Macro compiler D Symbolic macro program analysis D Macro program compilation D Object program output D Reference list/compile list output (2) Macro linker D Linkage editing of specified object programs and macro executor/compile parameters D ROM-format file output D Link list output (3) ROM file transmitter (CNC) D ROM-format file transfer to the CNC D Macro executor RAM operation (4) ROM file transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/FANUC FA Writer) D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files (5) Serial interface utility D Reading/transferring programs from the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P (6) ROM file transmitter (FANUC FA Writer (GP-IB interface) D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files (7) Memory card format conversion D Converting macro programs to a format capable of accepting write from a memory card The macro compiler utility is distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) floppy disk as an MS-DOS/PC-DOS package utility. The utility does not provide functions such as those for editing macro programs, and saving and restoring programs to and from floppy disks. For these functions, use MS-DOS/PC-DOS commands and editors available on the market.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 3
1. GENERAL
B–66102E/10
*
Create a macro program using an editor. (An editor is not supplied.)
*
The macro program (source file) must be in standard MS-DOS text format.
*
The macro compiler generates an object file. It also creates reference and compile lists at the same time as the object file.
*
The object file is linked based on a link control file to generate a ROM-format file. The editor creates the link control file (xx.MEX).
MS-DOS Editor
Macro Program (Source file)
MCOMP0 MCOMP15 MCOMP15I MACRO Compiler (xx.LNK)
(xx.REL)
LINK Control file
Macro Program (Obj file)
MLINK MLINK15I
* MACRO Linker
Macro Library file
FANUC supplies a macro library for each CNC model.
(xx.ROM) *
The ROM-format file contains macros in binary form output by the linker for a macro cassette.
ROM format file
MTRNSC
MMCARD MMCARD15 MMCARD15I
MROMWT /MROMVF
ROM file Transmitter
RS-232-C line CNC Series 16/18/20/21-TA RAM Operation
*
· The file is transferred to CNC through RS-232-C to execute RAM operation (Series 16/18/20/21-TA).
Memory Card file Converter
RS-232-C line GP-IB I/F
The ROM format file is executed on the CNC using the following methods:
(xx.MEM)
FANUC PMC Writer FA Writer
Memory Card Reader /Writer
Macro cassette
Memory Card
· The file is transferred to FANUC PMC Writer/ FA Writer, written in macro cassetter or ROM, then executed (Series 0/15-A/16-A/18-A). · The file is converted in Memory card format, transferred to CNC from memory card, then executed (Series 15-B/16-B/18-B/16-C/18-C /20/21–B/15i–A/16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/16i–B/ 18i–B/21i–B).
Fig.1.2 MACRO Compiler Utility Function Conceptual Diagram
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 4
2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
B–66102E/10
2
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
(1) Personal computer:
Main memory OS
(FMR/PC98) (PC-AT)
(Fujitsu : FMR Series) (NEC : PC98 Series) (IBM : PC-AT Series) 640K bytes or more
MS-DOS Version 3.1 and later PC-DOS Version 3.3 and later
Hard disk
About 1M bytes is required for install the system (Caution 1)
Floppy disk drive
5-inch floppy disk drive (2HD) 3.5-inch floppy disk drive (2HD) for 15i/16i/18i/21i (Caution 2)
Serial interface
RS-232-C serial interface
Miscellaneous (Option)
Printer (Note 1) GP-IB interface (Note 2)
(2) FANUC PMC-Writer or FANUC FA-Writer Serial interface (RS-232-C) GP-IB interface (option/FANUC FA-Writer only) CAUTION 1 The macro compiler utility software is installed on hard disk. This software occupies a hard disk space of about 1M bytes. In addition, developed macro programs and list files/object files generated at compile time are output as files on hard disk. So the size of hard disk depends on the macro programs developed. 2 The macro compiler utility software is distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series 15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. The macro executor is also distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series 15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. A 5-inch or 3.5-inch floppy disk drive is needed to install the system and executor files.
NOTE 1 The macro compiler and macro linker output a reference list, compile list, and link list as MS-DOS text files to hard disk. For output to the printer, use an MS-DOS/PC-DOS command. Text files are output in a format assuming an 80-character, 60-line printer. 2 The FANUC FA-Writer allows high-speed writing to ROM/verification based on the GP-IB interface. (Note that only NEC PC98 Series and IBM PC-AT Sereis currently supports this function.)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 5
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
3
B–66102E/10
SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
The FANUC MACRO Compiler software is distributed with two 5-inch (2HD) floppy disks or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series 15i/16i/18i/21i. To use the software, load the software to the hard disk from the system floppy disks. No.
Name
1
FANUC MACRO Compiler system floppy disk
2
FANUC MACRO Library system floppy disk
To install the system, some knowledge of the hardware and software of a personal computer to be used is needed. In particular, the user should be familiar with the handling of basic MS-DO/PC-DOS commands and files such as CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 6
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
B–66102E/10
3.1 INSTALLING THE SYSTEM FROM THE FANUC MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM FLOPPY DISK
Examples
This operation installs the FANUC MACRO Compiler system software on the hard disk. First set the FANUC MACRO Compiler system floppy disk in the floppy disk drive, then activate MSETUP.BAT on the floppy disk. > ?: \ > MSETUP
: The root directory of the system floppy disk contains MSETUP.BAT. : Specify the name of the drive containing the system floppy disk. : Specify the drive name of the hard disk to hold the system. ? :
The system floppy disk is set in drive B:, and the system is installed on the hard disk of drive A:. > B: \ > MSETUP B: A:
This operation creates the following directories in drive A:, and the system software and a sample program are copied to the hard disk. A:\MCOMP
\TOOL \MEX \USR
Explanation of the directories
\SAMPL
a) \MCOMP\TOOL The FANUC MACRO Compiler system software, batch files, document files, and so forth are stored under this directory. MCOMP0.EXE/MCOMP15.EXE/MLINK.EXE/ !System software RSFMR.BAT !RS-232-C setting batch file for Fujitsu FMR Series RSPC98.BAT !RS-232-C setting batch file for NEC PC98 Series RSPCAT.BAT !RS-232-C setting batch file for IBM PC-AT Series SYSTEM.DEF !System common symbol definition file (for $INCLUDE) b) \MCOMP\MEX Library file is stored under this directory. This file is loaded from the FANUC MACRO Library floppy disk. c) \MCOMP\USR Under this directory, create directories used to develop macro programs. A:\MCOMP
\TOOL \MEX \USR
\SAMPL \MODEL-A \MODEL-B \MODEL-C
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 7
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
B–66102E/10
d) \MCOMP\USR\SAMPL Under this directory, the files including such a link control file, compiler/link result files, and program files as described in Appendix D are stored. Use these files as reference information for development.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 8
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
B–66102E/10
3.2 INSTALLING THE EXECUTOR FILE FROM THE FANUC MACRO LIBRARY FLOPPY DISK
Examples
This operation loads the executor file under the library directory of the FANUC MACRO Compiler system installed by the operation of Section 3.1. As with the FANUC MACRO Compiler system floppy disk, set the FANUC MACRO Library floppy disk in the floppy disk drive, then activate ESETUP.BAT on the executor floppy disk. > ?:\>ESETUP
: The root directory of the library floppy disk contains ESETUP.BAT. : Specify the name of the drive containing the library floppy disk. : Specify the drive name of the hard disk holding the system. ? :
Set the library floppy disk in drive B:, and the library file is stored in the system installed on the hard disk of drive A:. > B:\>ESETUP B: A:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 9
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
3.3 PATH SETTING
B–66102E/10
All system software is contained under the \MCOMP\TOOL directory. So specify this directory by path setting with AUTOEXEC.BAT.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 10
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
B–66102E/10
3.4 COMPILER SERIES
To match the CNC series, there are three types of the FANUC MACRO Compiler system: a) For Series 0/Series 16/Series 18/Series 20/Series 21 b) For Series 15–A/15–B c) For Series 15i–A These Compiler systems are for the respective series only. Compiling the same macro program using these compiler systems generates different object codes. For this reason, be sure to use the execution files (macro compiler/linker/memory card converter) and library files suitable to the development model. (The library file names are given in Appendix L.) If multiple systems are to be installed on the same personal computer, it is recommended that a separate directory be used for each CNC series. CNC Series and Corresponding Software (See also Fig. 4.7.) CNC series
Macro compiler
0/16/18/20/21
MCOMP0
15–A/15–B
MCOMP15
15i–A
MCOMP15I
Macro linker MLINK MLINK15I
Memory card format converter MMCARD*1 MMCARD15*2 MCARD15I
*1 MMCARD is for the Series 16–B/16–C/16i–A/16i–B/18–B/18C/18i–A/18i–B/20/ 21–B/21i–A/21i–B/0i–A only. *2 MMCARD15 is for the Series 15–B only.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 11
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
B–66102E/10
3.5 SPECIFYING ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES 3.5.1 Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV)
A macro program or a ROM-format file is transferred via the RS-232-C/GPIB interface. The interface control systems vary between personal computer manufacturers. Control software including MPOUT, MROMWT, and MROMWTG is therefore designed to determine the control system according to the setting of the MDEV environment variable. Specify the MDEV environment variable as follows in AUTOEXEC.BAT before using control software. Setting of the MDEV environment variable set MDEV=PC98 : For the NEC PC98 Series set MDEV=FMR : For the Fujitsu FMR Series set MDEV=IBM : For the IBM PC Series When no MDEV environment variable is specified, control software runs in the control system for the NEC PC98 Series.
3.5.2 Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP)
The macro compiler or macro linker generates or deletes some temporary files (work files) for compiling or linking. The destination to which the temporary files are output can be specified with the MTMP environment variable. Setting of the MTMP environment variable set MTMP=B:\TEMP
If the temporary file output destination is specified as a RAM disk, compiling or linking time can be reduced. When no MTMP environment variable is specified, temporary files are generated in the current directory for compiling or linking and deleted after compiling or linking
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 12
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4
FUNCTIONS
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 13
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4.1 MACRO COMPILER (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/ MCOMP15i)
(1) Operation The macro compiler can compile macro programs created in the MS-DOS text file format. The macro compiler outputs an object file for the macro linker, reference list file, and compile list file. *1
*2
A:\> MCOMP0 file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21) A:\> MCOMP15 file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 15–A/B) A:\> MCOMP15I file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 15i–A)
Source File
Object File
Macro Program (xx.SRC)
Object MCOMP0 MCOMP15 MCOMP15I
Program (xx.REL)
Reference List File(xx.REF) Compile List File (xx.LST) MACRO COMPILER 1 O0001; 2 #100=#101+10;
*1 file-spec This specifies a macro program source file. The extension of a source file name must be .SRC. Source files to be compiled can be specified in three ways: (1) Compilation of a single file A:\> MCOMP0 ABC=> Compiles ABC.SRC. (2) Compilation of multiple cards by using a wild card A:\> MCOMP0 ABC*=>
Compiles all files whose names start with ABC and have the extension .SRC, (3) Selective compilation according to link control file specification A:\> MCOMP0 @ABC=>
Compiles all files specified in the link control file (file name: ABC.LNK). CAUTION As described in Section 3.4, even if the same macro program is compiled, the macro compiler for Series 0/16/18/20/21 creates an object file different from an object file created by the macro compiler for Series 15 and Series 15i. Select the compiler that matches a development model.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 14
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
*2 [parameters] This specifies compile conditions. –NR : Outputs no object file. If this parameter is omitted, an object file with the extension .REL is output. –L1 : Outputs no compile list file. If this parameter is omitted, a compile list file with the extension .LST is output. –L2 : Outputs no reference list file. If this parameter is omitted, a reference list file with the extension .REF is output. –L3 : Outputs a macro program file. If this parameter is omitted, no macro program file is output. A macro program file is output with the extension .PRG. –PR : Makes no symbolic macro program analysis. Specify this parameter when a program coded in standard macro program format is to be compiled. No reference list file is output. Even if this parameter is not specified, a macro program can be compiled without trouble. However, this parameter can save time required to make a symbolic macro program analysis and can also save space for reference list file output. –Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output. See item (7). –Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is output. –Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is output. –Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is output. (2) Macro program source file A macro program source file must be created in MS-DOS text file format. At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .SRC. The macro compiler can compile a macro program coded in symbolic format. For detailed information, see Chapter 5. The macro compiler can also compile a program coded in standard macro program format. In this case, specify the command parameter -PR. This parameter can save time required to make a symbolic macro program analysis and can also save space for reference list file output. (3) Object file An object file output by the compiler is subject to processing by the macro linker. The name of an object file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .REL is assigned to the object file. (4) Reference list file The reference list file is a list file output from macro program analysis processing. A source program, errors, error codes, symbol name cross reference information are listed. The name of a reference list file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .REF is assigned to the reference list file. For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS command.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 15
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
(5) Compile list file A compile list file is output as a result of macro program compilation after symbolic macro program analysis. A source program, errors, error codes, variable cross reference information, object file size information, and so forth are listed. The name of a compile list file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .LST is assigned to the compile list file. For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS command. (6) Macro program file By specifying the command parameter -L3, a macro program after macro program analysis processing can be preserved as a file. The name of a macro program file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .PRG is assigned to the macro program file. By using the serial interface utility described in Section 4.5, this file can be output to the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line. (7) Specifying the destinations to which the compiler outputs files The directory of the destinations to which the compiler outputs files can be specified as desired according to compiling conditions. However, this function is only effective for FANUC MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions. –Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output. –Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is output. –Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is output. –Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is output. Example) Compiling TEST.SRC and outputting TEST.REL to B:\OBJ MCOMP0 TEST -FoB:\OBJ
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 16
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4.2 MACRO LINKER (MLINK)
(1) Operation According to the specification in a link control file created beforehand, the macro linker creates a link list file and ROM-format file for creating a desired macro cassette. *1 *2 A:\> MLINK file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21/15–A/15–B) A:\> MLINK15I file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 15i–A)
Link control File
Link Control
ROM Format File
MLINK MLINK15I
(xx.LNK)
ROM File (xx.ROM)
Object File
Link List File(xx.MAP)
Object Program
MACRO LINKER prog. 1 O0001 2 O0002
(xx.REL)
Size. 00100H 00200H
Macro Library file (xx.MEX)
*1 file-spec This specifies a link control file created in a specified format beforehand. The extension of a link control file name must be .LNK. *2 [parameters] This specifies link conditions. –NR : Outputs no ROM-format file. If this parameter is omitted, a ROM-format file with the extension .ROM is output. –NL : Outputs no link list file. If this parameter is omitted, a link list file with the extension .MAP is output. –Fm : Specifies the destination to which a link list file is output. See item (4). –Fr : Specifies the destination to which a ROM-format file is output
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 17
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
(2) Link control file The link control file specifies a library file name, compile parameters, and object file names subject to linkage. As with a source file, a link control file must be created in MS-DOS text file format. At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .LNK. In a link control file, a library file name, compile parameters, and object file names subject to linkage are defined using keywords. A comment line can be provided by using /:. Keyword) CNC= CNC2= CNC3= P9999= FILE=
: : : : :
1st library file name for each CNC model See Appendix 2nd library file name for each CNC model L for details. 3rd library file name for each CNC model Compile parameters 9000 to 9059 Object file (Multiple object files can be specified with each name delimited by a comma.) HFILE= : Intel 32-bit hexadecimal file (Multiple object files can be specified with each name delimited by a comma.) SYSTEM= : path–name (Series 16i/18i/21i/15i) SYSTEM value
Specified path
MPATH1
First path of M series
MPATH2
Second path of M series
TPATH1
First path of T series
TPATH2
Second path of T series
LPATH1
First path of loader
* MPATH1 is fixed for series 15i–A
Example) /: /: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE (SAMPLE) /: /: FOR F16MB CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F16MB_07.MEX /: P9000=00010000 P9010=100 P9037=5 P9038=8000 /: JIKKOU-MACRO FILE=ABC,DEF FILE=XYZ,UVW /: TAIWA-MACRO FILE=SSS
The example above is for Series 16–MB. The compile parameters (Nos. 9000. 9010, 9037, and 9038) are set, and the object files (ABC.REF. DEF.REL, XYZ.REL, UVW.REL, and SSS.REL) are linked.
The specification of (=0) is assumed for those compile parameters that are not specified in the link control file. A link control file is used also as a selective compile control file by the macro compiler, as described in item (1) in Section 4.1. This function is useful in compiling all programs to be linked. A:\> MCOMP0 @ABS ⇒ compiles all files specified in the link control file (file name: ABC.LNK).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 18
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
(3) Link list file The link list file is output by the linker, and a library name, compile parameters, compile program list and size information, erroneous program numbers, error codes, ROM-format file size information and so forth are listed. The name of a link list file is the same as the link control file name, except that the extension .MAP is assigned to the link list file name. For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS command. (4) Specifying the destinations to which the macro linker outputs files The directory of the destinations to which the macro linker outputs files can be specified as desired according to linking conditions. NOTE This function is effective only for FANUC MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions. –Fm : Specifies a destination to which a link list file is output. –Fr : Specifies a destination to which a ROM-format file is output. Example: Generating SAMPL.MAP to directory B:\MAP and SAMPL.ROM to directory C:\ROM MLINK SAMPL -FmB:\MAP -FrC:\ROM
(5) Checking the size of ROM format file (Exclusive for Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 21-B, 16i–A/B, 18i–A/B, 21i–A/B, 0i–A and 15i–A) at linking macro A ROM format file that is created by linking (MLINK) is checked for its size whether it is overflown or not. The size of ROM format file is set by compile parameter No. 9000 and 9001 (No.8500 for series15i–A). If a prepared ROM format file may exceed the size that was set by compile parameter 9000 (No.8500 for series15i) and 9001 as a result of linking, an error is produced when the macro linker is executed. ERROR : ROM size over Bit No. Address Compile parameter
9000 Address
Compile parameter
#7
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
M3MB
M2MB
M1MB
M512
M256
M128
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
9001
#0
#0
M4MB
M4MB
M3MB
M2MB
M1MB
M512
M256
M128
4.0MB
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.0MB
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
2.0MB
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1.0MB
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
512KB
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
256KB
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
128KB
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 19
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
NOTE 1 For the 21-TB (Controller A), always specify 128 KB. 2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be specified. 3 For the 21-MB or 21-TB (Controller B), no more than 1.0 MB can be specified. 4 For the 0i–A, no more than 512 KB can be specified. D Series 15i–A Bit No. Address Compile parameter
#7
#6
8500
#5 R10
R10
R05
1.0MB 512KB
1 0
0 1
256KB
0
0
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
R05
NOTE For the Series 15i–A, only the combinations given in the table above are possible. (6) Error messages 1) When the Series 16i/18i/21i–A Macro library is linked using a macro linker (MLINK.EXE) of MACRO COMPILER version 03.2 or earlier, the following error will occur: ERROR:
Executer#1 is not specified
2) When the SYSTEM keyword is not specified, the following error will occur: ERROR:
Can not find SYSTEM define
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 20
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4.3 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (CNC) (FOR Series 16/18/20/21T–A)
A linked ROM-format file can be transferred to CNC memory via a RS-232-C line, and whether the created ROM-format file operates correctly can be checked using the macro executor RAM operation function of the CNC system. NOTE The Series 0i–A or Series 21–B does not support this function. (1) Operation After placing the CNC system in the macro executor receive ready state, a linked ROM-format file is transferred with the following command: A:\> MTRNSC file-spec parameters -F -S
*1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred. *2 parameters CNC model
Number of address bits
Addressing
Series 16
32
00800000
Series 18
24
800000
Series 20
24
980000
Series 21-TA
24
3A0000
–F : Overwriting loader command (See item (3).) –S : Not required in the Series 16/18–A. Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is transferred to Series 16-A. A:\> MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000
(2) RS-232-C interface For transfer, the RS-232-C serial interface channel at standard port No. 0 is used. Before a RS-232–C interface can be used, it must be set and initialized according to the conditions below. Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system Data length : 7 bits Parity : Enable/even parity Stop bit : Value set with the connected CNC system Xon/off control applied For detailed information, see Chapter 6. (3) Overwriting loader command effective Only a user macro program can be transferred (execution of the overwriting loader function ) by specifying the transfer parameter. First all the files are transferred once, then only the changed user macro program is transferred. This enables the macro program to be debugged. (This function is only effective for FANUC MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions.) Example) MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F
–F : Overwriting loader command When this command is specified, only the macro program (P-code program) is transferred from the ROM-format file; execution control software (executor) is not transferred.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 21
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
a) Activate the P-code loader function in the initialization loader function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701 = 0) to transfer all files from the personal computer. MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000
b) Debug the macro program. c) If an error is found, correct the macro program and compile or link the macro program to create the ROM-format file again. d) Activate the P-code loader function in the overwriting loader function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701 = 1). Specifying -F transfers the macro program from the personal computer. MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F
Repeat steps b), c), and d) to debug the macro program. If the library to be linked has been modified according to the software revision, the above procedure must be followed again from step a), transferring all files.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 22
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4.4 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC PMC WRITER/FANUC FA WRITER) (FOR Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A)
(1) Operation A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC PMC Writer or FANUC FA Writer via a RS-232-C line, and is written to a macro ROM and verified. A:\> MROMWT file-spec parameters
Write or write/verification A:\> MROMVF file-spec parameters
Verification *1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred. *2 parameters -K1xx : Cassette type (1) -K2xx : Cassette type (2) -IDxxxx: ID code -VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWT only). -VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWT only). -Pxx : Sets pulse width (with MROMWT only). -VF : Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with MROMWT only). For detailed information, see Appendix C. Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0 512K-byte ROM cassette, then is verified. A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM –K110 –K223 –ID50B2 –VCC0 –VP64 -P01 -VF
(2) RS-232-C interface For detailed information, see Chapter 6.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 23
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4.5 SERIAL INTERFACE UTILITY 4.5.1 Macro Program Input
(1) Operation A macro program is read from the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line, then is stored in an MS-DOS text file for the macro compiler. A macro program is transferred from the CNC/SYSTEM P after the command below is entered and the personal computer is placed in receive ready state. A:\> MPLOADA file-spec
1* file-spec This specifies the name of a text file for storing a macro program. Example: A macro program is read to A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC. A:\> MPLOADA A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC
CAUTION Select the ISO code as output code when transferring a macro program from the CNC/SYSTEM P.
4.5.2 Macro Program Output
(1) Operation A macro program output with the parameter -L3 described in Section 4.1 can be output to the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line. After the CNC/SYSTEM P is placed in program read ready state, a macro program is transferred by the command below. A:\> MPOUT file-spec parameters
*1 file-spec This specifies a macro program file to be transferred. *2 parameters –Fffff : Outputs fields (null code) before and after a macro program. By ffff, specify the number of fields to be output. –CR
: Specifies the output format of the EOB (;). When -CR is omitted:The EOB (;) is converted to LF(0AH)/CR(0DH)/CR(0DH). When -CR is specified:The EOB (;) is converted to LF(0AH).
(2) RS-232-C interface For detailed information, see Chapter 6.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 24
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4.6 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC FA WRITER, GP–IB INTERFACE) (FOR Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A)
(1) Operation A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA Writer via a GP-IB interface, and is written to a macro cassette and verified. Since a linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA Writer via a GP-IN interface, the file can be written to a macro cassette and verified at higher speed than when the file is transferred via a RS-232-C line (Section 4.4). A:\> MROMWTG file-spec parameters
Write or write/verification A:\> MROMVFG file-spec parameters
Verification *1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred. *2 parameters -K1xx : Cassette type (1) -K2xx : Cassette type (2) -IDxxxx : ID code -VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWTG only). -VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWTG only). -Pxx
: Sets pulse width (with MROMWTG only).
-VF
: Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with MROMWTG only).
For detailed information, see Appendix C. Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0 512K-byte ROM cassette, then is verified. A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223 -ID50B2 -VCC0 -VP64 -P01 -VF
(2) GP-IB interface For detailed information, see Chapter 7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 25
4. FUNCTIONS
B–66102E/10
4.7 CONVERSION TO A MEMORY CARD FORMAT (MMCARD) (THIS FUNCTION IS USED IN THE Series 15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B /18–C/20/21–B/ 16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/ 16i–B/18i–B/21i–B/ 0i–A.)
(1) Operation Convert a ROM-format file created by the macro linker (MLINK) to the memory-card format file which can be loaded from the memory card using the boot function of the Series 15-B/16-B/20. A:\> MMCARD file-spec (Series 16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/18i–B/21i–A/21i–B) A:\> MMCARD15 file–spec (Series 15–B)
*1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format File to be converted without extension. The name of MEM-format file is the same as ROM-format File name with the extension .MEM. Example: A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.ROM is converted into A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.MEM. A:\> MMCARD15 A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL
Series 16-B/16–C/18-B/ 18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/ 18i–B/21i–A/21i–B Source File
MCOMP0
Object File
Macro Program (xxx.SRC)
MCOMP15
Object Program (xxx.REL)
(Sereis 15-B) MCOMP15I Series 15–B/16–B/16–C/ 18–B/18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/ 18i–B/21i–A/21i–B
(Sereis 15i–A) Link Control File
MLINK
Link Control (xxx.LNK)
ROM File (xxx.ROM)
MLINK15I (Sereis 15i–A)
Macro Library File Macro Library (xxx.MEX)
MMCARD
MMCARD15
MMCARD15I
Series 16-B/16–C/18-B/ 18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/ 18i–B/21i–A/21i–B/ 0i–A
(Sereis 15-B)
(Sereis 15i–A)
To memory card COPY A:xxx.MEM F: (F: Memory card device number) Memory Card
Memory Card File Memory Card File (xxx.MEM)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 26
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM
B–66102E/10
5
SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM
A macro program is to be created according the rule described below. (1) A macro program must start with address O. Address % must be specified at the end of the file. Multiple programs can be coded in a single file. At this time, the start of each program can be identified by address O. Data after address %, if any, is ignored. When multiple programs are coded, address % must be coded at the end. O0001 #101=1; G00 X#101; : O0002 G243 X0 YX (ABS); #500=#501+#502; : %
(2) One line can contain only one block. The end of block (EOB) is represented by a semicolon (;). All data after a semicolon on a line is regarded as a comment. #100=#101; COMMENT G00 X123. Y234. ; G01 ; => ”G01 ;” after ; is regarded as comment. (3) All data after /: is regarded as a comment. A line starting with /* is regarded as a comment line; such a line is not compiled. /: comment
=> Compiler ignores this line as comment line.
/: comment /: O0001 ; /: comment
=> Compiler ignores this line as comment line.
G00 ...; ;/: comment
=> Blank block containing only ; is created.
M99; %
(4) Programming using symbolic names A symbolic name can be defined for a variable, expression, or character string to allow programming using symbolic names. A symbolic name can be defined as described below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 27
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM
B–66102E/10
Symbolic name definition @xxxx
yyyyyy
xxxx: Symbolic name (String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character) Version of the compiler
Version 1.4 or previous versions
Version 2.1 or subsequent versions
8
32
Maximum number of characters
yyyyyy: Definition character string (not longer than 80 characters) After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program is replaced by the corresponding definition character string. Example) @COUNT1 #100 @ON =1 @OFF =0 @CURSOR #8505 @RETURN M99 /: O0001 ; CURSOR ON ; COUNT1 = COUNT1+1 ; RETURN ;
==>> O0001 ; #8505 =1 ; #100 = #100+1 ; M99 ;
(5) Symbolic name for sequence number A symbolic name can be assigned to a sequence number as described below. In (4) above, a symbolic name is just used for a definition character string. On the other hand, a symbolic name for a sequence number is regarded as a sequence number when it is coded at the start of a block, and is regarded as a jump (GOTO) destination number when it is coded at a position other than the start of a block. Definition of symbolic name for sequence number >xxxx 9999
xxxx: Symbolic name for sequence number (String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character) Version of the compiler Maximum number of characters
Version 1.4 or previous versions
Version 2.1 or subsequent versions
8
32
9999: Number (not longer than four digits) After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program is replaced by the corresponding sequence number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 28
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM
B–66102E/10
Example) @COUNT1 #100 >JUMP1 100 >SKIP 200 /: O0002 ; ==> GOTO JUMP1 ; IF[COUNT1 LE 0]GOTO SKIP ; SKIP ; JUMP1 M99 ;
O0002 ; GOTO 100 ; IF[#100 LE 0]GOTO 200 ; N200 ; N100 M99 ;
(6) Automatic conversion of hiragana and kanji codes Hiragana and kanji, when coded in quotation marks and parentheses as (’ ’), can be auto-matically converted to internal macro compiler codes by coding. ’) ==> (:3929 3671 3872 3439 (’ 2437 245E 2439:)
Kanji and hiragana must be coded using full-size characters, and alphanumeric characters, spaces, special symbols must be coded using half-size characters. Specifying a compiling condition as -FS0 enables the characters usable in the Series 0 to be checked. When -FS0 is specified, the characters unusable in the Series 0 cause a compiling error. (This specification is only effective for FANUC MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions.) MCOMP0 TEST -FS0
(7) Reference to external file ($INCLUDE control statement) By using the $INCLUDE control statement, a program, symbol definition, and so forth contained in a separate file can be referenced. With this function, definitions and processing common to multiple programs can be specified in a separate file so that each program file can reference those definitions and processing. Example) Program file /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF /: O0003 ; ==> O0003 ; TAIWAP1 =5 ; #8500 =5 ; RETURN ; M99 ; Include file (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) /: @TAIWAP1 #8500 @RETURN M99 /:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 29
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM
B–66102E/10
(8) Array variable coding Variables can be used as a one-dimensional array by using a simple coding method. Coding method #999 999: Number of first variable in array By this coding method, variables can be referenced or written to as array data with an index indicated by the expression and starting with the variable specified in 999. #100 is equivalent to #[100+#101]. (9) Reference list page eject control ($EJECT control statement) By using the $EJECT control statement, reference list page eject operation can be freely controlled. Example) Program file /: $EJECT ⇐ Advances reference list page. /: O0003 ; D D
(10)Enhancement of IF and WHILE statements The IF and WHILE statements have been enhanced. (a) Determination of an operation result Only an operation expression can be specified as the condition of the IF or WHILE statement. The execution of the IF or WHILE statement is controlled depending on whether the operation result is equal to 0. Format: WHILE[operation-expression] DOx ; ENDx ; IF[operation-expression] GOTO xxx ; IF[operation-expression] THEN;
Example) The left macro instructions are equivalent to the right macro instructions. WHILE[#100]DO1; å WHILE[#100 NE 0]DO1; D D
END1;
D D
END1;
IF[#100+#101]GOTO123; å IF[[#100+#101]NE 0 ]GOTO123; IF[SIN[#1]]THEN #1=0; å IF [SIN[#1] NE 0] THEN #1=0 ;
(b) Logical operations, AND and OR Multiple conditions can be specified in an IF statement. The conditions ANDed or ORed control the execution of the IF statement. Format : IF[&&]GOTO xxx; IF[||]THEN ;
An AND is represented with an && sign and OR with an ££ sign. Up to three ANDs or ORs can be specified in a single IF statement. However, an AND and OR must not be specified together in a single IF statement.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 30
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM
B–66102E/10
IF[&&&&&& ] THEN; IF[|||||| ]GOTO xxx; IF[&&||] GOTO xxx ;
–OK –OK –NG
Example) IF[#100 EQ 1 && #101 GT 0] GOTO 100 ; IF[#100 E Q1 ||#101 NE 1 || #102 GT 10 ] THEN #102=1 ;
(c) IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF The syntax of an IF statement has been enhanced. Structured programming is possible using IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF. The following shows the formats of syntactically valid IF statements. IF[...]GOTO 999 ; IF[...]THEN Macro-st ; IF[...]THEN Macro-st; *Macro-st: ELSE Macro-st; Macro statement IF[...]THEN ; Statement ; D
*Statement:
Macro or NC statement
D
ENDIF ; IF[...]THEN ; Statement ; D D
ELSE ; Statement ; D D
ENDIF ;
a) When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the macro statement can be specified immediately after THEN/ELSE as shown in and . IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1; ELSE #101 = 2;
b) When an instruction to be executed is an NC statement or multiple instructions to be executed, the NC statement or multiple instructions must be specified between the THEN/ELSE line and ENDIF line as shown in and . IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN ; GO1 X100 Y200 ; ENDIF ;
When instructions with THEN and ELSE must be executed as shown in , the IF statement can be specified by combining the formats in a) and b).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 31
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM
B–66102E/10
IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1; ELSE ; #101 = 2 ; GOO X#103 ; ENDIF ;
Up to three levels of nesting of the IF statement are allowed. IF [...] THEN ; IF [...] THEN ; Statement ;
ELSE ; IF [...] THEN ; Statement ; ENDIF ; ENDIF ; Statement ;
ELSE ; Statement ;
ENDIF ;
CAUTION When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the macro statement can be specified immediately after THEN/ELSE. In this case, no ENDIF statement is usually required. However, an ENDIF statement is required when IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or ENDIF of the previous nesting as shown below: IF [...] THEN ; IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; ELSE ;
ENDIF ; äThe ENDIF line is required because IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or ENDIF of the previous nesting.
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; ENDIF ;
ENDIF ; äThe ENDIF line is required because IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or ENDIF of the previous nesting.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 32
6. RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING
B–66102E/10
6
RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING
To transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC system or FANUC PMC-Writer/FA-Writer for writing to ROM/verification or transfer a macro program, the RS-232-C interface is controlled using the DOS function call (21H) auxiliary I/O device (AUX) for MS-DOS. By device specification with CONFIG.SYS, enable RS-232-C ports to be controlled with the auxiliary I/O device (AUX). The RS-232-C interface must be set or initialized beforehand according to the conditions described below. If a transfer operation is once performed via a RS-232-C interface, and the RS-232-C is used again with the same or another command, the RS-232-C interface must be initialized. Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system Data length : 7 bits Parity : Enable/even parity Stop bit : Value set with the connected CNC system Xon/off control System installation processing creates, for use by the user, a standard batch file for RS-232-C interface initialization under the directory \MCOMP\TOOL.
(1) For Fujitsu FMR Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSFMR.BAT) Contents : SETUP RSC R0,4800,BITS-7, PARITY-EVEN.STOP-2,XON (2) For NEC PC98 Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPC98.BAT) Contents : SPEED RS232-0 4800 BITS-7 PARITY-EVEN STOP-2 XON (3) For IBM PC-AT Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPCAT.BAT) Contents : MODE COM1:48,E,7,2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 33
7. GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A)
7
B–66102E/10
GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR Series 0, 15-A, 16-A, 18-A)
The GP-IB interface performs interface processing by using a GP-IB BIOS driver provided by each personal computer supplier. The user is to prepare a GP-IB interface board for a personal computer model to use, and to initialize the board according to the operator’s manual before usage. (1) GP-IB interface board Use the GP-IB interface boards listed below. (a) NEC PC98 Series NEC GP-IB (IEEE-488) interface board (PC-9801-29N) (b) IBM PC-AT Series NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS VAT-GPIB Interface & NI-488.2 MS-DOS/NI-488.2 WindowGs SoftwareW FD3/FD5 NO.776207-1 (2) GP-IB interface board setting (a) Set the GP-IB address to 1E (hexadecimal). When an address other than 1E is to be used for some reason, the same address must be set in the parameter -MAxx of the ROM-format file transmitter command (MROMWTG/MROMVFG). When GP-IB address OF is set: A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223 -ID40B0 -MA0F
(b) Select the master mode rather than the slave mode. The master mode must be selected because the GP-IB control function is performed on the personal computer. (c) Others For other settings, refer to the operator’s manual of each GP-IB board. (3) FANUC FA Writer setting (a) Set the GP-IB address to 00 (hexadecimal). The address is factory-set to 00. (b) Set the transfer block size to 2058 bytes. The block size is factory-set to 256 bytes. (4) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer (a) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer to a GPIB interface. To switch the interface, turn on the power to the FANUC FA Writer while pressing the FUNCTION key. The FANUC FA Writer then enters the GPIB interface mode.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 34
B–66102E/10
8
8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE
SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE
When the system is installed, a system common symbol definition file is stored under the directory \MCOMP\TOOL. For macro program creation, the user should make full use of the symbolic names defined in the file for variables commonly used with the system. System common symbol definition file File name: \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF To use this file, use the external file reference function described in Item (7) in Chapter 5. For a usage example, see Appendix D. $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
For information about the defined symbols, see Appendix A.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 35
9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST
9
B–66102E/10
HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST
A source program coded using symbolic macro programs is converted by the macro compiler to a program in custom macro format for compile processing. The macro compiler outputs two types of list files: one for a reference list, and the other for a compile list. Since conversion processing is performed, the comment lines and symbol definition lines in a source program are not listed. For this reason, a reference list and compile list output two types of line numbers to identify a compile error in a source program. (1) Reference list A source program coded using symbolic macro programs, cross reference data of used symbols, error messages from conversion processing, and so forth are output in a reference list. Line number S-Line : Source program line number Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion (2) Compile list A program converted to a program in custom macro format, cross reference data of used variables, compile error messages, and so forth are output in a compile list. Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion Line number P-Line : Line number for each program number In the example below, the compile list has an error on G-Line 0002; the same G-Line 0002 in the reference list and the line 4 in the source program have this error. Example) *Reference list (xxx.REF) ---------- Program -------------------------
S-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6
G-Line
0001 0002 0003 0004
@ABC #100 /: O1000 ; ABD = 0 ; M99 ; %
*Compile list (xxx.LST) ---------- program O1000 ------------------G-Line P-Line 0001 1 O1000; 0002 2 ABD=0; error #140C -----------^ ***** ERROR : 140C Illegal function code. 0003 3 M99; 0004 4 %
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 36
APPENDIX
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
A
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
D SYSTEM. DEF for series 0/16/18/20/21 $NOLIST /: /: ************************************************************** /: * System common symbol define * /: * for series 0/16/18/20/21. (V01.03 1999.07.21) * /: ************************************************************** /: /: /: No.01 Control instruction code. /: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @CALL M98P /: Sub program call. @RETURN M99 /: Return to main program. @RETURNP M99P /: Return to main program with sequence No. /: @DISPLAY G243 /: Character display. @FORM F /: Format. @DATA D /: Data. @NSUP Z0 /: No Zero suppress. @ZSUP Z1 /: Zero suppress. /: @ELASE G202 /: CRT erase. @ELASEGR G202P1 /: Graphic erase. @ELASECH G202P2 /: Charactor erase. @ELASEAL G202P3 /: Graphic & Character erase. /: @RECTNG G204 /: Rectangle display. /: @GRPNT G206 /: Graphic paint out. /: @COLOR G240 /: Display color select. @BLACK G240P0 /: Black. @RED G240P1 /: Red. @GREEN G240P2 /: Green. @YELLOW G240P3 /: Yellow. @BLUE G240P4 /: Blue. @PERPLE G240P5 /: Perple. @SKYBL G240P6 /: Sky–blue. @WHITE G240P7 /: White. @REDR G240P–1 /: Reverse Red. @GREENR G240P–2 /: Reverse Green. @YELLOWR G240P–3 /: Reverse Yellow. @BLUER G240P–4 /: Reverse Blue. @PERPLER G240P–5 /: Reverse Perple. @SKYBLR G240P–6 /: Reverse Sky–blue. @WHITER G240P–7 /: Reverse White. /: @BON L1 /: Blink ON @BOF L0 /: Blink OFF
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 39
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) /: @DRLINEK @DRSTART @DRLINE @DRCW @DRCCW
G244 G242 G01 G02 G03
/: Graphic Line kind select. /: Draw start point. /: Linear line display. /: Circle display(CW). /: Circle display(CCW).
@GRCSR
G249
/: Graphic cursor.
/: /: @PMCDATA G310 @1BYTE L1 @2BYTE L2 @4BYTE L4
/: PMC relay/data read and write. 1 BYTE /: /: 2 BYTE /: 4 BYTE
/: @TRSVR G315 /: P–code variable transfer. @TRSVRNML G315P001/: normal transfer. @TRSVRUPT G315P002/: up transfer. @TRSVRDWT G315P003/: down transfer. @TRSVRARG G315P101/: transfer to arangement. @TRSVRUPA G315P102/: up transfer to arangement. @TRSVRDWA G315P103/: down transfer to arangement. /: @PAMAKE @PADELET @PACNDNS @PAREAD @PAWRITE @PABDELT @PACREAD @PACWRIT
G320 G321 G322 G325 G326 G327 G328 G329
/: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make) (Prog. delete) /: /: (Prog. condense) /: (Block read) /: (Block write) /: (Block delete) /: (Character block read) /: (Character block write)
@RSOPEN @RSCLOSE @RSRECV @RSSEND @RSVARRD @RSVARWT @RSFUNC
G330 G331 G335 G336 G337 G338 G339
/: RS232C open. /: close. /: receive 1ch. /: Data send. Variable data read. /: /: Variable data write. /: FANUC cassettee control.
@PMAFEED @PMACUT @PMADWLL @PMAREFC @PMAMSCL @PMASNRD @PMASNWT
G340 G341 G344 G345 G346 G348 G349
/: PMC AXIS feed. /: cutting. /: dwell. /: reference position return. /: miscellaneous function. /: signal read. /: signal write.
/:
/:
/: /: /: /:
No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @CMACRO1 #8500 /: Conversation MACRO – 1 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP1 #8500 @CMACRO2 #8550 /: Conversation MACRO – 2 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP2 #8550 @CMACRO3 #8551 /: Conversation MACRO – 3 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP3 #8551
/:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 40
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
@KEYCONT #8502 @NOREAD #8502=0 @NUMREAD #8502=1 @ADRREAD #8502=2 @ASCREAD #8502=3
/: MDI–KEY IN CONTROL. /: No Data read. /: Numeric Data read. /: Address+Numeric Data read. /: ASCII Data read.
@KEYCODE @PAGEDW @PAGEUP @CURDW @CURUP @ALTER @INSRT @DELET @INPUT @START @RESET @CURRT @CURLF @PINPUT
#8501 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 18 19 28
/: MDI–KEY IN CODE. /: ”Page Down” KEY pushed. /: ”Page Up” /: ”Cursor Down” ”Cursor Up” /: /: ”Alter” /: ”Insert” /: ”Delete” /: ”Input” /: ”Start/Output” /: ”Reset” /: ”Cursor Right” /: ”Cursor Left” /: ”Input” add decimal point
@SFTLF @SFT1 @SFT2 @SFT3 @SFT4 @SFT5 @SFTRT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
/: /: /: /: /: /: /:
”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft
key key key key key key key
left” 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” right”
(9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT)
@SFTFLF @SFTF1 @SFTF2 @SFTF3 @SFTF4 @SFTF5 @SFTF6 @SFTF7 @SFTF8 @SFTF9 @SFTF10 @SFTFRT
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft
key key key key key key key key key key key key
left” 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” 6” 7” 8” 9” 10” right”
(14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT)
/:
/:
/:
@KEYDATA @KEYADRS @KEYARRY
#8503 #8504 #8552
/: MDI–KEY IN DATA. /: MDI–KEY IN ADDRESS. /: MDI–KEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.
@CURSOR @CURSORX @CURSORY
#8505 #8506 #8507
/: CURSOR DISPLAY CONTROL. /: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (X). /: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (Y).
@CHRPROG @CRTFUNC
#8509 #8510
/: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No. /: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.
@ARRY2BS @ARRY3BS @ARRY1CT @ARRY2CT
#8512 #8513 #8516 #8517
/: /: /: /:
/:
/:
/: Array Array Array Array
CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 41
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
@ARRYTOP
#8519
/: Array CONTORL (Top variable No.)
@TRNSDAT @TRNS2BS @TRNS3BS @TRNS2TO @TRNS3TO
#8511 #8512 #8513 #8514 #8515
/: /: /: /: /:
Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
@PAPROGN @PABLOKN @PAVARNO @PAPNTVN @PAERROR
#8520 #8521 #8522 #8523 #8529
/: /: /: /: /:
CNC CNC CNC CNC CNC
@PABGEDT @PAPGCNT @PAFPMEM
#8526 #8527 #8528
/: BG–edit status. /: Program count. /: Free program memory.
@RSERROR
#8539
/: RS232C INTERFACE
@MDIKEYI
#8549
/: MDI Key image
@CUTTIME @CUTLENG
#8553 #8554
/: Cutting Time. /: Cutting length.
@HELPPNM @HELPRST
#8555 #8556
/: User’s HELP screen Prog. Num. /: User’s HELP return status.
@KEYLINX @KEYLINY @KEYINUM @KEYPRPT @KEYCLOR
#8561 #8562 #8563 #8564 #8565
/: /: /: /: /:
@ITLCNTL @ITLSTTS
#8600 #8601
/: Inter Lock control. /: Skip signal movement direction.
@PMGSLCT
#8602
/: PMC AXIS select.
@PCDWKNO
#8610
/: P–code Work No. search.
@TRQLTO1 @TRQLTO2 @TRQLTO3 @TRQLTO4 @TRQLTO5 @TRQLTO6 @TRQLTO7 @TRQLTO8
#8621 #8622 #8623 #8624 #8625 #8626 #8627 #8628
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
@CNVTAD1 @CNVTAD2 @CNVTAD3 @CNVTAD4
#8631 #8632 #8633 #8634
/: /: /: /:
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
@MSKCLAX @MSKCLTC
#8690 #8691
/: AXIS Macro call mask. /: T code call mask.
/: CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL
/: PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG.
ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS.
(PROGRAM No.) (BLOCK No.) (DATA VAR. No.) (POINT DATA VAR. No.) (RETURN CODE)
/:
/: (RETURN CODE)
/: /:
/:
/: KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY
in line X potion. in line Y potion. input number. in line prompt. in line color.
/:
/: (G–code control)
/: /: 1 limited torque override. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/: 1 A/D converter. 2 3 4
/:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 42
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
/: @PMVSLCT @PMVFLG1 @PMVCMD1 @PMVCSP1 @PMVLNG1 @PMVSTS1 @PMVFLG2 @PMVCMD2 @PMVCSP2 @PMVLNG2 @PMVSTS2 @PMVFLG3 @PMVCMD3 @PMVCSP3 @PMVLNG3 @PMVSTS3 @PMVFLG4 @PMVCMD4 @PMVCSP4 @PMVLNG4 @PMVSTS4
#8700 #8710 #8711 #8712 #8713 #8715 #8720 #8721 #8722 #8723 #8725 #8730 #8731 #8732 #8733 #8735 #8740 #8741 #8742 #8743 #8745
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
@WINDIDX @WINDDAT
#8998 #8999
/: Window Index. /: Window Data.
PMC AXIS select. (VARIABLE control) PMC 1 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status. PMC 2 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status. PMC 3 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status. PMC 4 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status.
/:
/: /: /: /:
No.03 System Variable. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @EMPTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ENMTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ALARM #3000 /: Alarm display. @TIMER1 #3001 /: Msec Timer. @TIMER2 #3002 /: Hour Timer. @SBKCNT #3003 /: Single blok/Auxilialy function control. @FLDCNT #3004 /: Feed hold/Over ride control. @SETTING #3005 /: Setting data. @DATE #3011 /: System date. @TIME #3012 /: System Time. @PARTCNT #3901 /: Part count. @PARTRQT #3902 /: Part request. @MDLG01 #4001 /: Modal G–code Group 1 @MDLG02 #4002 /: Modal G–code Group 2 @MDLG03 #4003 /: Modal G–code Group 3 @MDLG04 #4004 /: Modal G–code Group 4 @MDLG05 #4005 /: Modal G–code Group 5 @MDLG06 #4006 /: Modal G–code Group 6 @MDLG07 #4007 /: Modal G–code Group 7 @MDLG08 #4008 /: Modal G–code Group 8 @MDLG09 #4009 /: Modal G–code Group 9 @MDLG10 #4010 /: Modal G–code Group 10 @MDLG11 #4011 /: Modal G–code Group 11 @MDLG12 #4012 /: Modal G–code Group 12 @MDLG13 #4013 /: Modal G–code Group 13 @MDLG14 #4014 /: Modal G–code Group 14 @MDLG15 #4015 /: Modal G–code Group 15 @MDLG16 #4016 /: Modal G–code Group 16
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 43
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
@MDLG17 @MDLG18 @MDLG19 @MDLG20 @MDLG21 @MDLG22 @CORDF @CORDM @SEQNUM @PRGNUM @CORDS @CORDT
#4017 #4018 #4019 #4020 #4021 #4022 #4109 #4113 #4114 #4115 #4119 #4120
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
@ABSIO1 @ABSIO2 @ABSIO3 @ABSIO4 @ABSIO5 @ABSIO6 @ABSIO7 @ABSIO8 @ABSMT1 @ABSMT2 @ABSMT3 @ABSMT4 @ABSMT5 @ABSMT6 @ABSMT7 @ABSMT8 @ABSOT1 @ABSOT2 @ABSOT3 @ABSOT4 @ABSOT5 @ABSOT6 @ABSOT7 @ABSOT8 @ABSKP1 @ABSKP2 @ABSKP3 @ABSKP4 @ABSKP5 @ABSKP6 @ABSKP7 @ABSKP8 @OFSEXW1 @OFSEXW2 @OFSEXW3 @OFSEXW4 @OFSEXW5 @OFSEXW6 @OFSEXW7 @OFSEXW8 @OFS54W1 @OFS54W2 @OFS54W3 @OFS54W4
#5001 #5002 #5003 #5004 #5005 #5006 #5007 #5008 #5021 #5022 #5023 #5024 #5025 #5026 #5027 #5028 #5041 #5042 #5043 #5044 #5045 #5046 #5047 #5048 #5061 #5062 #5063 #5064 #5065 #5066 #5067 #5068 #5201 #5202 #5203 #5204 #5205 #5206 #5207 #5208 #5221 #5222 #5223 #5224
/: Block end position. 1’st /: 2’nd
Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group F cord M cord Sequece number Program number S cord T cord
17 18 19 20 21 22
/:
/: Machine Position.
/: Current absolute position.
/: Skip cutting position.
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
1 External workpiece reference offset. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 G54 workpiece reference offset. 2 3 4
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 44
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
@OFS54W5 @OFS54W6 @OFS54W7 @OFS54W8 @OFS55W1 @OFS55W2 @OFS55W3 @OFS55W4 @OFS55W5 @OFS55W6 @OFS55W7 @OFS55W8 @OFS56W1 @OFS56W2 @OFS56W3 @OFS56W4 @OFS56W5 @OFS56W6 @OFS56W7 @OFS56W8 @OFS57W1 @OFS57W2 @OFS57W3 @OFS57W4 @OFS57W5 @OFS57W6 @OFS57W7 @OFS57W8 @OFS58W1 @OFS58W2 @OFS58W3 @OFS58W4 @OFS58W5 @OFS58W6 @OFS58W7 @OFS58W8 @OFS59W1 @OFS59W2 @OFS59W3 @OFS59W4 @OFS59W5 @OFS59W6 @OFS59W7 @OFS59W8 /: /: /: /:
#5225 #5226 #5227 #5228 #5241 #5242 #5243 #5244 #5245 #5246 #5247 #5248 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5264 #5265 #5266 #5267 #5268 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5284 #5285 #5286 #5287 #5288 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5304 #5305 #5306 #5307 #5308 #5321 #5322 #5323 #5324 #5325 #5326 #5327 #5328
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
G55 workpiece reference offset.
G56 workpiece reference offset.
G57 workpiece reference offset.
G58 workpiece reference offset.
G59 workpiece reference offset.
No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @ON =1 @OFF =0
/: $LIST
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 45
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
B–66102E/10
D SYSTEM. DEF for series 15i0/16/18/20/21 (Possible to use this symbol definition evenby series 15B) $NOLIST /: /: ************************************************************* /: * System common symbol define. * * for series15i (V01.01 1999.07.21) * /: /: ************************************************************* /: /: /: No.01 Control instruction code. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ /: @CALL M98P /: Sub program call. @RETURN M99 /: Return to main program. @RETURNP M99P /: Return to main program with sequence No. /: @ELASE G202 /: CRT erase. Graphic erase. @ELASEGR G202P1 /: @ELASECH G202P2 /: Charactor erase. @ELASEAL G202P3 /: Graphic & Character erase. /: @COLOR G240 /: Display color select. Black. @BLACK G240P0 /: @RED G240P1 /: Red. @GREEN G240P2 /: Green. Yellow. @YELLOW G240P3 /: @BLUE G240P4 /: Blue. @PERPLE G240P5 /: Perple. Sky–blue. @SKYBL G240P6 /: @WHITE G240P7 /: White. @REDR G240P–1 /: Reverse Red. Reverse Green. @GREENR G240P–2 /: @YELLOWR G240P–3 /: Reverse Yellow. Reverse Blue. @BLUER G240P–4 /: @PERPLER G240P–5 /: Reverse Perple. @SKYBLR G240P–6 /: Reverse Sky–blue. Reverse White. @WHITER G240P–7 /: /: @BON L1 /: Blink ON Blink OFF @BOF L0 /: /: @ABSMOD G390 /: Absolute mode @INCMOD G391 /: Incremental mode /: @CURSOR G230 /: Cursor display control. @CLEN L /: cirsor length /: @DISPLAY G243 /: Character display. @FORM F /: Format. @DATA D /: Data. No Zero suppress. @NSUP Z0 /: @ZSUP Z1 /: Zero suppress. /: @KEYPRPT G280 /: Prompt display. /: @RECTNG G204 /: Rectangle display. /: @DRLINEK G244 /: Graphic Line kind select.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 46
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
@DRSTART @DRLINE @DRCW @DRCCW
G242 G301 G302 G303
/: /: /: /:
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
Draw start point. Linear line display. Circle display(CW). Circle display(CCW).
/: @PMCDATA G310 @1BYTE L1 @2BYTE L2 @4BYTE L4
/: PMC relay/data read and write. /: 1 BYTE /: 2 BYTE /: 4 BYTE
/: @TRSVR G315 /: P–code variable transfer. @TRSVRNML G315P001/: normal transfer. @TRSVRUPT G315P002/: up transfer. @TRSVRDWT G315P003/: down transfer. @TRSVRARG G315P101/: transfer to arangement. @TRSVRUPA G315P102/: up transfer to arangement. @TRSVRDWA G315P103/: down transfer to arangement. /: @PAMAKE @PADELET @PAREAD @PAWRITE @PABDELT @PACREAD @PACWRIT
G370 G371 G375 G376 G377 G328 G329
/: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make) /: (Prog. delete) /: (Block read) /: (Block write) /: (Block delete) (Character block read) /: /: (Character block write)
@RSOPEN @RSCLOSE @RSRECV @RSSEND @RSVARRD @RSVARWT @RSFUNC
G330 G331 G335 G336 G337 G338 G339
/: RS232C open. /: close. /: receive 1ch. /: Data send. /: Variable data read. /: Variable data write. /: FANUC cassettee control.
@PMAFEED @PMACUT @PMADWLL @PMAREFC @PMAMSCL @PMASNRD @PMASNWT
G340 G341 G344 G345 G346 G348 G349
/: PMC AXIS feed. cutting. /: /: dwell. /: reference position return. /: miscellaneous function. /: signal read. /: signal write.
/:
/:
/: /: /: /:
No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @CMACRO1 #8500 /: Conversation MACRO – 1 MAIN PROGRAM No. @AMACRO1 #8600 /: Auxliary MACRO–1 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP1 #8500
/: @KEYCONT #8502 @NOREAD #8502=0 @NUMREAD #8502=1 @ADRREAD #8502=2 @ASCREAD #8502=3
/: MDI–KEY IN CONTROL. /: No Data read. /: Numeric Data read. /: Address+Numeric Data read. /: ASCII Data read.
@KEYCODE @PAGEDW
/: MDI–KEY IN CODE. /: ”Page Down” KEY pushed.
/: #8501 1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 47
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
@PAGEUP @CURUP @CURDW @CURLF @CURRT @INPUT @RESET @SFTRT @SFT1 @SFT2 @SFT3 @SFT4 @SFT5 @SFT6 @SFT7 @SFT8 @SFT9 @SFT10
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
”Page Up” ”Cursor Up” ”Cursor Down” ”Cursor Left” ”Cursor Right” ”Input” ”Reset” ”Soft key right” ”Soft key 1” ”Soft key 2” ”Soft key 3” ”Soft key 4” ”Soft key 5” ”Soft key 6” ”Soft key 7” ”Soft key 8” ”Soft key 9” ”Soft key 10”
/: @KEYDATA @KEYADRS @KEYARRY
#8503 #8504 #8552
/: MDI–KEY IN DATA. /: MDI–KEY IN ADDRESS. /: MDI–KEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.
@CHRPROG @CRTFUNC
#8509 #8530
/: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No. /: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.
@ARRY2BS @ARRY3BS @ARRY1CT @ARRY2CT @ARRYTOP
#8512 #8513 #8516 #8517 #8519
/: /: /: /: /:
Array Array Array Array Array
@TRNSDAT @TRNS2BS @TRNS3BS @TRNS2TO @TRNS3TO
#8511 #8512 #8513 #8514 #8515
/: /: /: /: /:
Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
@PAPROGN @PABLOKN @PAVARNO @PAPNTVN @PAERROR
#8520 #8521 #8522 #8523 #8529
/: /: /: /: /:
CNC CNC CNC CNC CNC
@PABGEDT @PAPGCNT @PAFPMEM
#8526 #8527 #8528
/: BG–edit status. /: Program count. /: Free program memory.
@RSERROR
#8539
/: RS232C INTERFACE
@MDIKEYI0 @MDIKEYI1 @MDIKEYI2 @MDIKEYI3 @MDIKEYI4 @MDIKEYI5 @MDIKEYI6
#8540 #8541 #8542 #8543 #8544 #8545 #8546
/: /: /: /: /: /: /:
/:
/: CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL (Top variable No.)
/: CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL
/: PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG.
ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS.
(PROGRAM No.) (BLOCK No.) (DATA VAR. No.) (POINT DATA VAR. No.) (RETURN CODE)
/:
/: (RETURN CODE)
/: MDI MDI MDI MDI MDI MDI MDI
Key Key Key Key Key Key Key
image image image image image image image
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 48
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
@MDIKEYI7 @MDIKEYI8 @MDIKEYI9
#8547 #8548 #8549
/: MDI Key image /: MDI Key image /: MDI Key image
@CUTTIME @CUTLENG
#8553 #8554
/: Cutting Time. /: Cutting length.
@ITLCNTL @ITLSTTS
#8605 #8606
/: Inter Lock control. /: Skip signal movement direction.
@PMGSLCT
#8602
/: PMC AXIS select.
@PCDWKNO
#8610
/: P–code Work No. search.
@TRQLTID @TRQWT @TRQRD @TRQLTAX @TRQLTVL @TRQLTER
#8990 100 101 #8991 #8992 #8993
/: Limited torque /: write. /: read. /: /: /:
@CNVADID1 @ADGEN @ADSPDL @ADAXS @CNVADID2 @CNVADVAL @CNVADERR
#8997 400 401 402 #8998 #8999 #8996
/: A/D converter /: general. spindle. /: /: axis. /: /: /:
@MSKCLAX @MSKCLTC
#8690 #8691
/: AXIS Macro call mask. /: T code call mask.
/:
/:
/: (G–code control)
/: /: override ID.
axis no. value.(0–255) return code.
/: ID1.
ID2. value. return code.
/:
/: /: /: /:
No.03 System Variable. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @EMPTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ENMTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ALARM #3000 /: Alarm display. @TIMER1 #3001 /: Msec Timer. @TIMER2 #3002 /: Hour Timer. @SBKCNT #3003 /: Single blok/Auxilialy function control. @FLDCNT #3004 /: Feed hold/Over ride control. @MDLG01 #4001 /: Modal G–code Group 1 @MDLG02 #4002 /: Modal G–code Group 2 @MDLG03 #4003 /: Modal G–code Group 3 @MDLG04 #4004 /: Modal G–code Group 4 @MDLG05 #4005 /: Modal G–code Group 5 @MDLG06 #4006 /: Modal G–code Group 6 @MDLG07 #4007 /: Modal G–code Group 7 @MDLG08 #4008 /: Modal G–code Group 8 @MDLG09 #4009 /: Modal G–code Group 9 @MDLG10 #4010 /: Modal G–code Group 10 @MDLG11 #4011 /: Modal G–code Group 11 @MDLG12 #4012 /: Modal G–code Group 12 @MDLG13 #4013 /: Modal G–code Group 13 @MDLG14 #4014 /: Modal G–code Group 14 @MDLG15 #4015 /: Modal G–code Group 15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 49
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
@MDLG16 @MDLG17 @MDLG18 @MDLG19 @MDLG20 @MDLG25 @MDLG26 @CORDF @CORDM @SEQNUM @PRGNUM @CORDS @CORDT
#4016 #4017 #4018 #4019 #4020 #4025 #4026 #4109 #4113 #4114 #4115 #4119 #4120
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
@ABSIO1 @ABSIO2 @ABSIO3 @ABSIO4 @ABSIO5 @ABSIO6 @ABSIO7 @ABSIO8 @ABSIO9 @ABSI10 @ABSMT1 @ABSMT2 @ABSMT3 @ABSMT4 @ABSMT5 @ABSMT6 @ABSMT7 @ABSMT8 @ABSMT9 @ABSMT10 @ABSOT1 @ABSOT2 @ABSOT3 @ABSOT4 @ABSOT5 @ABSOT6 @ABSOT7 @ABSOT8 @ABSOT9 @ABSOT10 @ABSKP1 @ABSKP2 @ABSKP3 @ABSKP4 @ABSKP5 @ABSKP6 @ABSKP7 @ABSKP8 @ABSKP9 @ABSKP10 @OFSEXW1 @OFSEXW2 @OFSEXW3
#5001 #5002 #5003 #5004 #5005 #5006 #5007 #5008 #5009 #5010 #5021 #5022 #5023 #5024 #5025 #5026 #5027 #5028 #5029 #5030 #5041 #5042 #5043 #5044 #5045 #5046 #5047 #5048 #5049 #5050 #5061 #5062 #5063 #5064 #5065 #5066 #5067 #5068 #5069 #5070 #5201 #5202 #5203
/: Block end position. 1’st /: 2’nd
Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group F cord M cord Sequece number Program number S cord T cord
16 17 18 19 20 25 26
/:
/: Machine Position.
/: Current absolute position.
/: Skip cutting position.
/: AXIS 1 External workpiece reference offset. /: AXIS 2 /: AXIS 3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 50
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
@OFSEXW4 @OFSEXW5 @OFSEXW6 @OFSEXW7 @OFSEXW8 @OFSEXW9 @OFSEXW10 @OFS54W1 @OFS54W2 @OFS54W3 @OFS54W4 @OFS54W5 @OFS54W6 @OFS54W7 @OFS54W8 @OFS54W9 @OFS54W10 @OFS55W1 @OFS55W2 @OFS55W3 @OFS55W4 @OFS55W5 @OFS55W6 @OFS55W7 @OFS55W8 @OFS55W9 @OFS55W10 @OFS56W1 @OFS56W2 @OFS56W3 @OFS56W4 @OFS56W5 @OFS56W6 @OFS56W7 @OFS56W8 @OFS56W9 @OFS56W10 @OFS57W1 @OFS57W2 @OFS57W3 @OFS57W4 @OFS57W5 @OFS57W6 @OFS57W7 @OFS57W8 @OFS57W9 @OFS57W10 @OFS58W1 @OFS58W2 @OFS58W3 @OFS58W4 @OFS58W5 @OFS58W6 @OFS58W7 @OFS58W8 @OFS58W9 @OFS58W10
#5204 #5205 #5206 #5207 #5208 #5209 #5210 #5221 #5222 #5223 #5224 #5225 #5226 #5227 #5228 #5229 #5230 #5241 #5242 #5243 #5244 #5245 #5246 #5247 #5248 #5249 #5250 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5264 #5265 #5266 #5267 #5268 #5269 #5270 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5284 #5285 #5286 #5287 #5288 #5289 #5290 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5304 #5305 #5306 #5307 #5308 #5309 #5310
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS 10 AXIS 1 G54 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G55 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G56 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G57 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G58 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
workpiece reference offset.
workpiece reference offset.
workpiece reference offset.
workpiece reference offset.
workpiece reference offset.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 51
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
@OFS59W1 @OFS59W2 @OFS59W3 @OFS59W4 @OFS59W5 @OFS59W6 @OFS59W7 @OFS59W8 @OFS59W9 @OFS59W10 /: /: /: /:
#5321 #5322 #5323 #5324 #5325 #5326 #5327 #5328 #5329 #5330
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:
AXIS 1 G59 workpiece reference offset. AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10
No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @ON =1 @OFF =0
/: $LIST
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 52
B–66102E/10
B
B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE
The table below indicates the error codes that may occur in compile processing. Compile Error Codes (1/3) Meaning
Error code 0000
Normal termination
0201
Too many programs
0202
There is no program.
1001
Block delete number contains decimal point.
1002
Block delete number other than 1 to 9 is coded.
1003
Program number is coded not at start of program.
1004
Sequence number is coded not at start of block.
1005
NC statement has format error.
1006
Code other than EOB is present at end of macro statement.
1007
Equal sign cannot be found with macro statement.
1008
DO nesting depth exceeded 3 levels.
1009
Relation operator cannot be found in conditional expression.
100a
IF is not followed by GOTO.
100b
Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for IF[].
100c
GOTO n is followed by code other than EOB.
100d
DO m is followed by code other than EOB.
100e
END m is followed by code other than EOB.
100f
Identification number of END does not match DO.
1010
END to match DO cannot be found.
1011
WHILE is not followed by DO.
1012
Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for WHILE[].
1013
Block not identifiable as NC statement or macro statement is present.
1014
DO to match END cannot be found.
1015
Program number of directory does not match program number in program.
1016
Program number is missing at start of program.
1017
Error in the IF [...] THEN part
1018
Error in the SETVN statement
1019
Error in DEFADD
101a
Error in the POPEN command
101b
Error in the PCLOS command
101c
Error in the BPRNT command
101d
Error in the DPRNT command
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 53
B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Compile Error Codes (2/3) Error code
Meaning
101e
Error in the PGN command
101f
Error in the FDEL command
1020
Error in the FOPEN command
1021
Error in the FCLOS command
1022
Error in the FREAD command
1023
Error in the FWRITE command
1024
Error in the FPSET command
1025
Too many IF [...] THEN parts
1027
”ccall” not followed by EOB code
1028
The multiplicity of IF [...] THEN parts exceeds 3.
1029
AND and OR conditions in the IF [...] part
1030
”ENDIF” not found for the IF [...] THEN part
1031
More than four ANDs or ORs
1033
The number of ”ELSEs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.
1034
The number of ”ENDIFs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.
1035
The number of ”THENs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.
1201
Nesting depth of parentheses exceeded 5 levels.
1202
Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for #[].
1203
Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for [].
1204
Second opening bracket ([) cannot be found for ATAN[]/[].
1205
Slash (/) cannot be found for ATAN[]/[].
1206
First closing bracket (]) cannot be found for ATAN[]/[].
1207
Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for function [].
1208
Format of contains error.
1209
Format of on left side of assignment statement contains error.
120a
Format of in [], -[], or GOTO[] contains error.
120b
Error in the array
1401
Numeric value longer than 8 digits is present.
1402
Decimal point is followed by code other than number.
1403
Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.
1404
# is not immediately followed by number or opening bracket ([).
1405
Program number is longer than 4 digits.
1406
Sequence number is longer than 4 digits.
1407
Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for function [].
1408
Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for IF[] or WHILE[].
1409
Number m in DO m or END m is longer than 1 digit.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 54
B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Compile Error Codes (3/3) Error code
Meaning
140a
Number m in DO m or END m is not number from 1 to 3.
140b
DO or END is followed by code other than number.
140c
Alphabetic character string not identifiable as control command or function are present.
140d
Alphabetic character string longer than 5 characters is present.
140e
EOR is missing at end of program.
140f
Code not usable in program is present.
1410
Character string is longer than 255 characters.
1411
Internal code is longer than 4 characters.
1412
Internal code is not represented in hexadecimal.
1413
Internal code that cannot be represented is specified.
1414
Character string command starting with (* does not end with *).
1415
Pair of parentheses contains unallowable character.
1416
Unusable character found between ”,” and ”;”
1417
Unusable character found between ”@” and ”@”
1418
Error in the ”@” and ”@” specification
1419
Hexadecimal code exceeding two digits
1420
Error in the characters or length of a hexadecimal character string
1421
’0’ or ’N’ not followed by a digit
1601
Temporary variable area used for executor is insufficient. NC statement of 1 block includes too many addresses containing .
1602
GOTO destination is to great. Set jump destination for 4-byte output with parameter, or reduce program.
1603
NC statement of 1 block contains more than 50 addresses.
1604
Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.
1605
Macro variable number is negative.
1606
Macro variable number contains decimal point.
1607
Number after GOTO is longer than 4 digits.
1608
Number after GOTO contains decimal point.
1681
One program contains more than 200 GOTO statements specifying sequence numbers directly.
1682
Sequence number for GOTO destination cannot be found.
1683
One program contains more than 100 WHILE statements.
1684
Multiple sequence numbers are present for GOTO destination.
1801
ROM cassette overflowed.
1900
”%” not found or not correct
2000
Press the RESET button.
2001
Unable to read an NC program
8000
Error in a program number
8001
Unable to convert ASCII codes
9999
missmatch err_code !!
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 55
C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE
C
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE
Cassette type
–K1xx
–K2xx
–IDxxxx
–VCxx
–VPxx
–Pxx
Series 0
64Kbyte
–K110
–K223
–ID40B0
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 0
128Kbyte
–K110
–K226
–ID50B0
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 0
256Kbyte
–K110
–K223
–ID40B1
–VCC0
–VP64
–P01
Series 0
512Kbyte
–K110
–K223
–ID50B2
–VCC0
–VP64
–P01
Series 0
1M byte
–K110
–K223
–ID40B2
–VCC0
–VP64
–P01
Series 15
256Kbyte
–K110
–K223
–ID60BD
–VCC0
–VP64
–P01
Series 15
512Kbyte
–K110
–K223
–ID80BD
–VCC0
–VP64
–P01
Series 16A
256Kbyte
–K111
–K230
–IDFFF4
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 16A
512Kbyte
–K111
–K230
–IDFFF3
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 16A
1M byte
–K111
–K230
–IDFFF2
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 16A
2M byte
–K111
–K231
–IDFFF1
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 18A
128Kbyte
–K110
–K230
–IDFFF5
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 18A
256Kbyte
–K110
–K230
–IDFFF4
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 18A
512Kbyte
–K110
–K230
–IDFFF3
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 18A
1M byte
–K110
–K230
–IDFFF2
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Series 18A
2M byte
–K110
–K231
–IDFFF1
Omitted
Omitted
Omitted
Example 1) A Series 0 128K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified. A:\> MRO WT SAMPL.ROM –K110 –K226 –ID50B0 –VF
Example 2) A Series 15 512K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified. A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K221 -ID80BD -VCC0-VP64 -P01 -VF
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 56
D
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
The compile/link example described below is created under the directory X:\MCOMP\USR\SAMPL
when the macro compiler utility system is installed. Details of sample: Times required for instruction execution by each of the conversational macros are measured: 1. #100 = #101+#102 ; 2. #100 = #101 AND #102 ; 3. #100 = SIN[#101] ;
The number of test operations is set beforehand in the common variable (#500). Time required for looping by the number of test operations by the WHILE instruction is measured by the timer variable (#3001). Then time required for the same number of loops by the WHILE instruction containing an instruction subject to measurement is measured. Thus the difference between two measurement times is the execution time of the instruction subject to measurement. (1) Programs created File name = MAIN.SRC File name = SUB1.SRC
Main source program file Subprogram source file
File File File File File File
Main program reference list file Main program compile list file Main program object file Subprogram reference list file Subprogram compile list file Subprogram object file
name name name name name name
= = = = = =
MAIN.REF MAIN.LST MAIN.REL SUB1.REF SUB1.LST SUB1.REL
(2) Macro liner File name = SAMPL.LNK File name = SAMPL.MAP File name = SAMPL.ROM
Link control file Link map list file ROM-format file
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 57
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Main program source file
File name : MAIN.SRC
/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. /: (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14) /: /: /: ( MAIN Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @WORK #100 /: Work regster. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT /: /: No. O1000 : Main program. /: O1000 ; NUMREAD ; Numeric data input. CURSOR OFF ³ Delete this line in Series15. ; Cursol OFF DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (’EXECUTION TIME TEST’) ; ”MENU” display. X2 Y2 (’1.#101=#102+#103’) ; X2 Y3 (’2.#101=#102 AND #103’); X2 Y4 (’3.#101=SIN[#102]’) ; ; LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.) ; IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN ; ”INPUT” key push ? IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN ; 0 < DATA < 3 chk. IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN ; ; No-ope. Time GET. COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; COUNT = COUNT -1 ; No-operation loop. END1 ; TIMESAV = TIMER1
; ;
Sample time save.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 58
B–66102E/10
TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000
APPENDIX
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
; Jump To TEST progra. ; O1x00:x=key in data. ; ; END of conv. MACRO.
FIN RETURNP LOOP /: /: $EJECT /: /: /: No. O1001 : Answer display sub program. /: /: LOOPCT : TEST Loop count. /: TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time. /: TSTTIME : Measured Time. /: O1001 ; DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER) ; Loop count display. X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT ; ; X5 Y6 (TOTAL TIME) ; Total measuer Time X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC); display. ; WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT ; 1 operation Time X5 Y8 (ONE OPERATION) ; display. X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK K1 (MSEC) ; ; RETURN ; Return to main. /: /: %
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 59
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Main program reference list file
(F0/F16)
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:3 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
File name : MAIN.REF Page 1 MAIN.SRC
---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------
---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------
S-Line G-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218
/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. /: (Vol 01.01 /: /: /: ( MAIN Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF $NOLIST /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @WORK #100 /: Work regster. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT
1997.03.14)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 60
B–66102E/10
(F0/F16)
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:3 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
Page 2 MAIN.SRC
S-Line G-Line 219 /: 220 /: No. O1000 : Main program. 221 /: 222 0001 O1000 ; 223 0002 NUMREAD ; Numeric data input. 224 0003 CURSOR OFF ; Cursol OFF 225 0004 DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (’EXECUTION TIME TEST’) ; ”MENU” display. 226 0005 X2 Y2 (’1.#101=#102+#103’) ; 227 0006 X2 Y3 (’2.#101=#102 AND #103’); 228 0007 X2 Y4 (’3.#101=SIN[#102]’) ; 229 0008 ; 230 0009 LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.) ; 231 0010 IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN ; ”INPUT” key push ? 232 0011 IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN ; 0 < DATA < 3 chk. 233 0012 IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN ; 234 0013 ; No-ope. Time GET. 235 0014 COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. 236 0015 TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. 237 0016 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; 238 0017 COUNT = COUNT -1 ; No-operation loop. 239 0018 END1 ; 240 0019 TIMESAV = TIMER1 ; Sample time save. 241 0020 ; 242 0021 TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000 ; Jump To TEST progra. 243 0022 ; O1x00:x=key in data. 244 0023 ; 245 0024 FIN RETURNP LOOP ; END of conv. MACRO. 246 /: 247 /: 248 $EJECT
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 61
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
(F0/F16)
APPENDIX
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
B–66102E/10
Page 3 MAIN.SRC
S-Line G-Line 249 /: 250 /: 251 /: No. O1001 : Answer display sub program. 252 /: 253 /: LOOPCT : TEST Loop count. TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time. 254 /: 255 /: TSTTIME : Measured Time. 256 /: 257 0025 O1001 ; 258 0026 DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER) ; Loop count display. 259 0027 X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT ; 260 0028 ; 261 0029 X5 Y6 (TOTAL TIME) ; Total measuer Time 262 0030 X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC); 263 0031 ; 264 0032 WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT ; 1 operation Time 265 0033 X5 Y8 (ONE OPERATION) ; 266 0034 X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK K1 (MSEC) ; 267 0035 ; 268 0036 RETURN ; Return to main. 269 /: 270 /: 271 0037 %
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 62
display.
display.
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
(F0/F16)
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
Page 4 MAIN.SRC
---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------Symbol RETURN RETURNP DISPLAY FORM DATA ZSUP TAIWAP1 NUMREAD KEYCODE INPUT KEYDATA CURSOR TIMER1 OFF LOOPCT TIMESAV TSTTIME COUNT WORK LOOP FIN
Define M99 M99P G243 F D Z1 #8500 #8502=1 #8501 8 #8503 #8505 #3001 =0 #500 #501 #502 #100 #100 100 999
Line No. 268 245 225, 230, 259, 266 259, 262, 259 242 223 231 231 232, 233, 224 236, 240 224 235, 259, 240, 262, 262, 264 235, 237, 264, 266 230, 245 231, 232,
258 266
242
264 264 238, 238
233, 245
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 63
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Main program compile list file
File name : MAIN.LST
-----------------------------------
(F0/F16)
14-Mar-1997 16:27:43 Macro Compiler V01.01
Page 1 MAIN.SRC
---------- Compile Parameter -------------------------------------------------- program O1000 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0001 1 O1000; 0002 2 #8502=1; 0003 3 #8505=0; 0004 4 G243X0Y0B0(*0045 0058 0045 0043 0055 0054 0049 004F004E 004D 0045 0020 0054 0045 0053 0054*); 0005 5 X2Y2(*0031 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0031 0030 0033*); 0006 6 X2Y3(*0032 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 004E 0044 0020 0023 0031 0030 0033*); 0007 7 X2Y4(*0033 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E 0030 0032 005D*); 0008 8 ; 0009 9 N100G243X8Y11B1(SELECT TEST NO.); 0010 10 IF[#8501NE8]GOTO999; 0011 11 IF[#8503LT1]GOTO999; 0012 12 IF[#8503GT3]GOTO999; 0013 13 ; 0014 14 #100=#500; 0015 15 #3001=0; 0016 16 WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; 0017 17 #100=#100-1; 0018 18 END1; 0019 19 #501=#3001; 0020 20 ; 0021 21 #8500=#8503*100+1000; 0022 22 ; 0023 23 ; 0024 24 N999M99P100;
0020 0054 0049 0032 002B 0023 0032 0020 0041 005B 0023 0031
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 24 blocks, 24 total lines program size = 250 bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 64
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
(F0/F16)
14-Mar-1997 16:27:46 Macro Compiler V01.01
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
Page 2 MAIN.SRC
---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #500 #501 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502 #8503 #8505
: : : : : : : : :
14, 16, 17, 17, 14, 19, 15, 19, 21, 10, 2, 11, 12, 21, 3,
(F0/F16)
14-Mar-1997 16:27:46 Macro Compiler V01.01
Page 3 MAIN.SRC
---------- program O1001 --------------------------------------------G-Line 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037
P-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
O1001; G243X5Y4B0(SANPLE COUNTER); X20Y4F6Z1D#500; ; X5Y6(TOTAL TIME); X20Y6D[#502-#501]K1(MSEC); ; #100=[#502-#501]/#500; X5Y8(ONE OPERATION); X20Y8F5.2D#100K1(MSEC); ; M99; %
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 13 blocks, 13 total lines program size = 145 bytes 14-Mar-1997 16:27:47 (F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01
Page 4 MAIN.SRC
---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #500 #501 #502
: : : :
8, 3, 6, 6,
10, 8, 8, 8,
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 65
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
Subprogram source file
B–66102E/10
File name : SUB1.SRC
/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14) /: /: /: /: ( SUB Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @MAINPR 1000 /: MAIN Program No. @DISPSUB 1001 /: Answer display SUB Program. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT /: /: /: (#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test. /: /: No. O1100 : SUB program. /: /: O1100 ; NOREAD ; NO data read. ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102+#103 TEST’) ; Operation code disp. ; COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; #101 = #102 + #103 ; (Time Measure) COUNT = COUNT -1 ; END1 ; ; TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save. CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 66
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN RETURNP LOOP FIN
TAIWAP1 = MAINPR RETURN
/: /: $EJECT /: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1200 NOREAD
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
; ; ; ”RESET” key wait. ; ; ; ;
(#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test. No. O1200 : SUB program.
; ; NO data read. ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102 AND #103 TEST’); Operation code disp. ; COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; #101 = #102 AND #103 ; (Time Measure) COUNT = COUNT -1 ; END1 ; ; TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save. ; CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp. ; LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ; IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait. RETURNP LOOP ; ; FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ; RETURN ; /: /: $EJECT /: /: /: (#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test. /: /: No. O1300 : SUB program. /: /: O1300 ; NOREAD ; NO data read. ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=SIN[#102]’) ; Operation code disp.
COUNT = LOOPCT TIMER1 = 0
; ; Loop counter set. ; Timer initialize.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 67
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 #101 = SIN[#102] COUNT = COUNT -1 END1 TSTTIME = TIMER1 CALL
DISPSUB
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN RETURNP LOOP FIN
TAIWAP1 = MAINPR RETURN
APPENDIX
; ; (Time Measure) ; ; ; ; Measure Time save. ; ; Measure Time disp. ; ; ; ”RESET” key wait. ; ; ; ;
%
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 68
B–66102E/10
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Subprogram reference list file
File name :SUB1.REF
--------------------------------------
(F0/F16)
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
Page 1 SUB1.SRC
---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------
---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------
S-Line G-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219
/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. (Vol 01.01 /: /: /: /: ( SUB Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: pINCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF pNOLIST /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @MAINPR 1000 /: MAIN Program No. @DISPSUB 1001 /: Answer display SUB Program. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT
1997.03.14)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 69
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
(F0/F16)
S-Line 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251
APPENDIX
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
B–66102E/10
Page 2 SUB1.SRC
G-Line
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1100 NOREAD
(#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test. No. O1100 : SUB program.
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102+#103 TEST’) COUNT = LOOPCT TIMER1 = 0 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 #101 = #102 + #103 COUNT = COUNT -1 END1 TSTTIME = TIMER1 CALL
DISPSUB
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN RETURNP LOOP FIN
TAIWAP1 = MAINPR RETURN
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
NO data read. Operation code disp. Loop counter set. Timer initialize. (Time Measure)
Measure Time save. Measure Time disp.
”RESET” key wait.
/: /: $EJECT
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 70
(F0/F16)
S-Line 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
Page 3 SUB1.SRC
G-Line
0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1200 NOREAD
(#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test. No. O1200 : SUB program.
; ; ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102 AND #103 TEST’); ; COUNT = LOOPCT ; TIMER1 = 0 ; WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; #101 = #102 AND #103 ; COUNT = COUNT -1 ; END1 ; ; TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; ; CALL DISPSUB ; ; LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ; IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; RETURNP LOOP ; ; FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ; RETURN ; /: /: $EJECT
NO data read. Operation code disp. Loop counter set. Timer initialize. (Time Measure)
Measure Time save. Measure Time disp.
”RESET” key wait.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 71
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
(F0/F16)
S-Line 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313
APPENDIX
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
B–66102E/10
Page 4 SUB1.SRC
G-Line
0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067
/: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1300 NOREAD
(#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test. No. O1300 : SUB program.
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=SIN[#102]’) COUNT = LOOPCT TIMER1 = 0 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 #101 = SIN[#102] COUNT = COUNT -1 END1 TSTTIME = TIMER1 CALL
DISPSUB
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN RETURNP LOOP FIN
TAIWAP1 = MAINPR RETURN
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
NO data read. Operation code disp. Loop counter set. Timer initialize. (Time Measure)
Measure Time save. Measure Time disp.
”RESET” key wait.
%
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 72
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
(F0/F16)
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01
Page 5 SUB1.SRC
---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------Symbol CALL RETURN RETURNP DISPLAY
Define M98P M99 M99P G243
TAIWAP1 NOREAD KEYCODE RESET TIMER1
#8500 #8502=0 #8501 10 #3001
LOOPCT TSTTIME COUNT
#500 #502 #100
MAINPR DISPSUB LOOP
1000 1001 100
FIN
999
Line No. 241, 273, 248, 280, 245, 277, 230, 243, 307 247, 279, 228, 260, 244, 276, 244, 276, 233, 239, 303 232, 264, 239, 271, 232, 234, 266, 268, 300, 300 247, 279, 241, 273, 243, 245, 309 244, 247, 311
305 312 309 262, 275, 294, 311 292 308 308 265, 271, 297, 296 303 236, 236, 264, 268, 296, 298, 311 305 275, 277, 307, 276, 279, 308,
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 73
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
Subprogram compile list file
B–66102E/10
File name : SUB1.LST
(F0/F16)
14-Mar-1997 16:27:57 Macro Compiler V01.01
Page 1 SUB1.SRC
---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------
---------- program O1100 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0001 1 0002 2 0003 3 0004 4 0030 0033 0020 0054 0005 5 0006 6 0007 7 0008 8 0009 9 0010 10 0011 11 0012 12 0013 13 0014 14 0015 15 0016 16 0017 17 0018 18 0019 19 0020 20 0021 21 0022 22
O1100; #8502=0; ; G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 002B 0023 0031 0045 0053 0054*); ; #100=#500; #3001=0; WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; #101=#102+#103; #100=#100-1; END1; ; #502=#3001; ; M98P1001; ; N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY); IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999; M99P100; ; N999#8500=1000; M99;
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 22 blocks, 22 total lines program size = 163 bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 74
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #101 #102 #103 #500 #502 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502
: : : : : : : : : :
6, 8, 10, 10, 9, 9, 9, 6, 13, 7, 13, 21, 18, 2,
(F0/F16)
14-Mar-1997 16:27:59 Macro Compiler V01.01
Page 3 SUB1.SRC
---------- program O1200 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0023 1 0024 2 0025 3 0026 4 0044 0020 0023 0031 0054*); 0027 5 0028 6 0029 7 0030 8 0031 9 0032 10 0033 11 0034 12 0035 13 0036 14 0037 15 0038 16 0039 17 0040 18 0041 19 0042 20 0043 21 0044 22
O1200; #8502=0; ; G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 0020 0041 004E 0030 0033 0020 0054 0045 0053 ; #100=#500; #3001=0; WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; #101=#102AND#103; #100=#100-1; END1; ; #502=#3001; ; M98P1001; ; N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY); IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999; M99P100; ; N999#8500=1000; M99;
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 22 blocks, 22 total lines program size = 167 bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 75
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #101 #102 #103 #500 #502 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502
: : : : : : : : : :
6, 8, 10, 10, 9, 9, 9, 6, 13, 7, 13, 21, 18, 2,
(F0/F16)
14-Mar-1997 16:28:01 Macro Compiler V01.01
Page 5 SUB1.SRC
---------- program O1300 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0045 1 0046 2 0047 3 0048 4 0032 005D*); 0049 5 0050 6 0051 7 0052 8 0053 9 0054 10 0055 11 0056 12 0057 13 0058 14 0059 15 0060 16 0061 17 0062 18 0063 19 0064 20 0065 21 0066 22 0067 23
O1300; #8502=0; ; G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E 005B 0023 0031 0030 ; #100=#500; #3001=0; WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; #101=SIN[#102]; #100=#100-1; END1; ; #502=#3001; ; M98P1001; ; N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY); IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999; M99P100; ; N999#8500=1000; M99; %
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 23 blocks, 23 total lines program size = 156 bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 76
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #101 #102 #500 #502 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502
: : : : : : : : :
6, 8, 10, 10, 9, 9, 6, 13, 7, 13, 21, 18, 2,
Link control file
File name : SAMPL.LNK
--------------------------------------
/: /: Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ /: /: /: Library file ’FS0-MC’ /: CNC=\MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX /: /: compile parameter P9000 - P9009 and P9010 - P9059 /: P9000=10000010 P9001=00000001 P9002=00100000 P9003=00000001 P9037=5 P9038=1000 /: /: Link file’s /: FILE=MAIN FILE=SUB1 /:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 77
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Link map list file
File name : SAMPL.MAP
--------------------------------------
Fri Mar-14-1997 16:28:3 Macro Linker V01.01
Page 1
SAMPL.MAP ---------- Library List -----------------------------------------------NO 1 LIBRARY
FILE NAME
LIBRARY NAME
\MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX
0-MC MACRO
---------- Compile Parameter ------------------------------------------P9000 P9001 P9002 P9003 P9037 P9038
= = = = = =
10000010 00000001 00100000 00000001 5 1000
---------- Object List ------------------------------------------------FILE NAME
PROG
MAIN.REL
01000 01001 01100 01200 01300
SUB1.REL
SIZE 0000FAH 000091H 0000A3H 0000A7H 00009CH
---------- ROM FILE SIZE ----------------------------------------------SIZE = 10000H ( 64KB )
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 78
B–66102E/10
E
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M
MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 Super CAP M/Super CAP II M
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 79
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M
E.1 INTRODUCTION
B–66102E/10
Appendix E describes how to operate the tool for supporting the conversational automatic programming function (Super CAP M/Super CAP II M) for milling machines. The user can convert conversational programming menu definition programs together with other macro programs to ROM-format files in a personal computer using the procedure below: The procedures for creating a ROM file and MEM file for Super CAP M or Super CAP II M are described below. (1) Create the following menu definition programs with an editor. D Menu definition program D Conversational data definition program D Data item display program (2) Convert a source file to the table data file in the Super CAP/Super CAP II M table format using the macro converter (MCONV). Example: MCONV JZH_PARA JZH_PARA: Name of source program file for table data (3) Compile the source programs to object files using the macro compiler (MCOMPO). Example: MCOMPO MACHINE MACHINE: Source program file name (4) Use the macro linker (MLINK) to convert the object and table data files to ROM–format files. Example: MLINK BJ64_J BJ64_J: Link control file name (5) Use the MEM file conversion tool (MMCARD) to convert ROM–format files to memory–card–format files. This step is not required for the Series 16/18–MA. Example: MMCARD BJ64_J BJ64_J: ROM–format file name For the syntax of menu definition programs, refer to the ”Super CAP M Programming Manual” (B-62153E). NOTE A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has been signed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 80
B–66102E/10
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M
E.2 MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) E.2.1 Outline
A source file (extension: .DAT) containing a menu definition program, conversational data definition program, and data item display program is converted to the table data file (extension: .TBL). The conversion result is output to the table conversion list (extension: .LST).
Menu definition program Conversational data definition program
MCONV
Table data (***.TBL)
Data item display program (***.DAT) Table conversion list (***.LST)
E.2.2 Operation
The command format is as follows: A:\>MCONV file-spec parameters
(1) file-spec Specifies the name of a source file to be converted. Specify a file name in one of the two ways below: D Directly specify a file name or file names (Examples) A:\>MCONV ABC DEF GHI
This command converts ABC.DAT, DEF.DAT, and GHI.DAT. D Specify a link control file (Examples) A:\>MCONV @XYZ
This command converts the files specified with TBL= in XYZ.LNK. For details, see Chapter 3. (2) parameters The following parameters can be specified. –NR : Disables table data and files to be output. –L1 : Disables the table conversion list to be output.
E.2.3 Source File
Create a source file consisting of menu definition programs in the format of a text file. Be sure to assign extension .DAT to the source file. The menu definition program, conversational data definition program, and data item display program can be combined into the file as desired in program units. All programs can be created in a single file. If a single file contains a single program, up to 488 files can be created.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 81
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M
E.2.4 Table Data File
E.2.5 Table Conversion List File
B–66102E/10
This file, which is output by the converter, is to be edited by the macro linker. The name of the table data file is the same as that of the source file but with extension .TBL.
Conversion results, such as the list of source programs, error locations, error numbers, and converted file/program numbers, are output to this file. The name of the table conversion list file is the same as that of the source file but with extension .LST.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 82
B–66102E/10
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M
E.3 CONVERSION OF TABLE DATA WITH THE MACRO LINKER (MLINK) E.3.1 Outline
E.3.2 Link Control File
The table data file output by the macro converter can be converted together with the object file output by the macro compiler to ROM-format files with the macro linker.
The following shows an example of specifying a table data file. In the example, the table data file consists of MENU.TBL for menu definition, DATA.TBL for conversational data, and KOMK.TBL for data item display. /: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE /: SYSTEM FILE CNC=A:\BJ64.PG1 CNC2=A:\BJ64.PG2 CNC3=A:\BJ64.PG3 /: LINK PARAMETER P9000=11000000 P9001=00000001 P9002=11000000 P9003=10000000 P9007=10000000 P9033=12 P9037=5 9038=8000 /: MACRO PROGRAM FILE=ABC,DEF /: TABLE DATA TBL=MENU,DATA,KOMK /:
E.3.3 Link List File
The link list file to be output by the linker contains a table data file name, program numbers, and program size as well as macro program functions. The file name is the same as that of the link control file but the extension is replaced with MAP.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 83
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
F
APPENDIX
CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 84
B–66102E/10
B–66102E/10
F.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
The conventional Super CAP system (referred to below as CAP), compiles and links all the required user programs (referred to below as programs) into a single MEM file (referred to below as a module), then loads that file into the CNC. Modular Super CAP (modular CAP) allows programs to be loaded into the CNC as a set of modules. The modules include a CAP control module, provided as a library, and other program modules. After the CAP control module has been loaded into the CNC, a user–developed module (user module) can be independently modified or loaded. NOTE The modular function can be used with the modular CAP only.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 85
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
F.2 DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
The requirements for developing a user module and operating it on the CNC are listed below: (1) Personal computer D Main memory: At least 640K bytes D OS: MS–DOS Version 3.1 or above D Hard disk: Minimum of about 20M bytes D 3.5” floppy disk drive (2) Peripherals D Memory card adapter D 4M–byte flash memory card (Intel iMC004–FLSA) (3) FANUC macro compiler (for personal computers) D A08B–9001–J760#EN07 (for FANUC Series 16i) D A08B–9001–J765#EN07 (for FANUC Series 18i) (4) FANUC Super CAP macro library D CAP module D Macro libraries 1 and 2 for developing user modules (5) NC D NC system supporting modular CAP D Macro capacity of at least 3M bytes D F–ROM module with sufficient capacity to transfer the CAP control module and user modules
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 86
B–66102E/10
F.3 CAP CONTROL MODULE
APPENDIX
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
The CAP control module is a MEM file that is provided in place of the conventional library file. The CAP control module is loaded into the CNC. The CAP control module contains the following programs: D CAP system control program D FANUC standard macro program (Super CAP II T only)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 87
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
F.4
The following user modules can be created:
USER MODULES
D Up to two user modules (user modules 1 and 2). D The maximum total size of user modules 1 and 2 is 768K bytes for Super CAP II T and 1.625M bytes for Super CAP II M. The subsequent sections describe the procedure for creating a user module, restrictions, and notes.
F.4.1
The following macro libraries are provided for creating the user modules:
Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules
D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II T: F16ITP1.MEX, F16ITP2.MEX D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II M: F16IMP1.MEX, F16IMP1C.MEX, F16IMP2.MEX NOTE 1 F16?P1.MEX and F16?P1C.MEX are used to create user module 1. 2 F16?P2.MEX is used to create user module 2.
F.4.2 Developing a User Module
Follow the conventional procedure for developing a user module. Specify a macro library for developing a user module instead of the conventional macro library. Then, compile and link the modules, and convert the modules into memory card format. The compile parameters to be specified are the same as the conventional parameters. When specifying the size of the memory card module, however, specify the size of the user module in the compile parameter indicated below: Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
9000
LD6
M3MB
M2MB
M1MB
M512
M256
M128
#0
Do not specify those bits indicated by shading. Always specify LD6 to 1. Size
M512
M256
M128
512KB
1
0
0
256KB
0
1
0
128KB
0
0
1
The size of user module 1 of Super CAP II M is always 1.375M bytes. Do not specify the M512 bit for user module 2 of Super CAP II M. Specify the series and edition of the user module by adding the following two lines to the link file. SERN = series VERN = edition The series and edition can be specified with a combination of up to four characters each from numerals (0 to 9 and upper–case A to Z). The series and edition specified in the link file are displayed on the conversational system configuration screen (Super CAP only).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 88
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
NOTE Specify the user module series/edition display.
When a single user program is divided into two modules, specify the same compile parameters (except parameter 9000) in the link files for user modules 1 and 2.
F.4.3 Transferring the User Module to F–ROM
User modules 1 and 2 must be loaded into F–ROM separately from the CAP control module. The CAP control module and user modules 1 and 2 have the following file names on the F–ROM. D CAP control module PDff_CAP Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter. T when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or TPATH2. M when SYSTEM is MPATH1 or MPATH2. Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter. 1 when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or MPATH1 2 when SYSTEM is TPATH2 or MPATH2
D User module 1 P1ff Size specified in compile parameter 9000. However, _CAP is indicated for Super CAP II M.
D User module 2 P2ff
F.4.4 Executing the User Program
When a FANUC standard program and a user program have identical program numbers, the user program takes priority. A FANUC standard program can, therefore, be changed by creating a new program in the user module and assigning it the number of the FANUC standard program to be changed (Super CAP II T only). When user modules 1 and 2 have identical program numbers, that specified in user module 2 takes priority.
F.4.5 Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module
(1) User modules 1 and 2 should not have identical user program numbers. If the modules have identical program numbers, the program specified in user module 2 takes priority. (2) Identical compile parameters must be specified in user modules 1 and 2 (except for compile parameter 9000). (3) The total size of user modules 1 and 2 must not exceed the following: D Super CAP II T: 768K bytes D Super CAP II M: 1.625M bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 89
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
F.5 RESTRICTIONS IMPOSED ON THE SYSTEM
(1) The P–CODE loading function cannot be used with modular CAP. (2) No program can be executed with the user modules only. The CAP control module is necessary.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 90
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
F.6 CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II T
D Example Create a 256K–byte user module 1 and link it with the user programs of CAPS and auxiliary processes. Create a 512K–byte user module 2 and link it with a user–developed machining macro program.
F.6.1 Creating Programs
(1) Edit the string file (CAPS.SRC) to change the title of the Super CAP T basic menu screen and the series and edition of the standard macro displayed on the system configuration screen. Character string of the series and edition of D Before editing the user program displayed on the conversa-
Several lines omitted tional system configuration screen /* 123456789012 ; N9998 (’BB0H_ZZ’) ; /* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 N9999 (’FANUC SUPER CAPIIT!’) Several lines Character string displayed as the title of the Super omitted CAP T basic menu screen
D After editing Several lines omitted N9998 (’ABCDEFG’) ; /* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 N9999 (’DEBUG SYSTEM FOR SUPER CAP T!’) Several lines omitted
(2) Create user programs for auxiliary processes. D O1004.SRC D O1005.SRC D O1006.SRC (3) Create a machining macro program. D USR_PRG.SRC
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 91
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
F.6.2
Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.
Creating Link Files
D Link file for user module 1 (F16ITP1.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– /* /* executer file ’FS16TI for VGA’ /* Macro library for user module 1 CNC =F16ITP1.MEX SERN =USR1 Add these lines to the link file to display the VERN =0001 series and edition of user module 1. SYSTEM=TPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /* P9000=10000100 Specify a size of 256K bytes. P9001=10000001 P9002=11000000 P9003=10001001 P9007=01000000 P9009=00000100 Common part shared by user programs 1 and 2 P9013=200 P9021=208 P9022=209 P9023=320 P9024=321 P9030=27 P9031=28 P9033=97 P9037=7 P9044=2044 P9038=4999 /* /* Link file’s /* String file: The string file is also included in the FILE=CAPS Super CAP control module. A program speciFILE=O1004 fied in a user module takes priority. FILE=O1005 FIEL=O1006
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 92
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
D Link file for user module 2 (F16TCP2.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– /* /* executer file ’FS16TI for VGA’ /* Macro library for user module 2 CNC =F16ITP2.MEX SERN =USR2 Add these lines to the link file to display the seVERN =0001 ries and edition of user module 2. SYSTEM=TPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /* Specify a size of 512K bytes. P9000=10001000 P9001=10000001 P9002=11000000 P9003=10001001 P9007=01000000 P9009=00000100 P9013=200 P9021=208 P9022=209 P9023=320 P9024=321 P9030=27 P9031=28 P9033=97 P9037=7 P9044=2044 P9038=4999 /* /* Link file’s /* FILE=USR_PRG
Common part shared by user programs 1 and 2
After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created: D F16ITP1.MEM: 256K bytes D F16ITP2.MEM: 512K bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 93
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
F.7 CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II M
D Example Create a 1.375M–byte user module 1 and link it with a conversational macro program and C program. Create a 256K–byte user module 2 and link it with a user–developed auxiliary macro program.
F.7.1 Creating Programs
(1) While referring to a FANUC standard macro program, create the following conversational macro programs and conversational macro definition tables: D TL_AUTO.SRC D FS_AUTO.SRC D ZH_DATA.SRC D ZH_MENU.SRC D JPN_MENU.TBL D ZH_PARA.TBL (2) Create a required C program. D CPROG.C (3) Create an auxiliary macro program. D AUX_PRG.SRC NOTE A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has been signed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 94
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
F.7.2
Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.
Creating Link Files
D Link file for user module 1 (F16IMP1.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Macro library for user module 1. /* If user module 1 is not linked /* executer file ’FS16MI for VGA’ with a C program, use /* F16IMP1.MEX. CNC =F16IMP1C.MEX SERN =USR1 Add these lines to the link file to display the series and VERN =0001 edition of user module 1. SYSTEM=MPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /v P9000=10000000 The size is always 1.375M bytes and need not P9001=00000001 be specified. P9002=11000000 P9003=10000000 P9007=10000000 P9009=00000010 P9033=12 /* /* Link file’s /* FILE=TL_AUTO FILE=FS_AUTO Conversational macro program FILE=ZH_DATA FILE=ZH_MENU /* /* Table Data /* TBL=JPN_MENU Conversational macro definition table TBL=ZH_PARA /* /* C Program /* C program (when linked) HFILE=CPROG
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 95
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
D Link file for user module 2 (F16MCP2.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– /* /* executer file ’FS16MI for VGA’ /* Macro library for user module 2 CNC =F16IMP2.MEX SERN =USR2 Add these lines to the link file to display the VERN =0001 series and edition of user module 2. SYSTEM=MPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /* P9000=10000100 Specify a size of 256K bytes. P9001=00000001 P9002=11000000 Common part shared by user programs P9003=10000000 1 and 2 P9007=10000000 P9009=00000010 P9033=12 /* /* Link file’s /* FILE=AUX_PRG
After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created: D F16IMP1.MEM: 1.375M bytes D F16IMP2.MEM: 256K bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 96
B–66102E/10
G
APPENDIX
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 20, 21-B, 0i-A)
G.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 G.2 OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 G.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 G.4 SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (Series 20) . . . . . 118 G.5 FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (Series 20) . . . 120
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 97
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
G.1 OUTLINE
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
The boot system of first loads the CNC system software (flash RAM ! DRAM), then starts execution of the CNC software so that other software can be executed. (Some models run the CNC system software entirely in flash memory or EPROM, without using DRAM.) The CNC boot system supports the following system maintenance functions: (1) Registering a file in flash memory Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card conforming to JEIDA V4.1. (2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash memory (3) Deleting a file from flash memory (4) Batch saving of parameters, programs, and other files, powered by battery (SRAM area), to a memory card and batch restoring of data from the memory card (5) Writing a file in flash memory to a memory card (6) Formatting a memory card (7) Deleting a file from a memory card This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the operation and corresponding screen displays for the functions listed above.
G.1.1 Starting the BOOT SYSTEM
BOOT SYSTEM is automatically started when the CNC is powered on. It then loads and starts the CNC system software. The user, therefore, can usually ignore the operation of BOOT SYSTEM. When maintenance is carried out or if flash memory does not contain a required file, however, the boot system must be controlled from an on-screen menu. (1) During system maintenance, for example, when a file in flash memory is to be replaced Operation: Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft keys at the right end.
Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.
(2) If flash memory does not contain a file required to start the CNC If the file required to start the CNC (NC BASIC) is not found in flash memory, or if that file is damaged, the BOOT SYSTEM menu is automatically displayed when the CNC is powered on.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 98
B–66102E/10
G.1.2 System File and User File
APPENDIX
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
The boot system manages files in flash memory by dividing them into two main groups: system files and user files. These two groups have the following characteristics:
D System files
CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
D User files
PMC sequence program (ladder), P-CODE macro program, and other user-created files
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 99
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
G.2 OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
When the boot system is started, the MAIN MENU screen appears. The contents of this screen are described below:
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
10.
60M1 - 05
SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA DELETE SYSTEM DATA SAVE SRAM DATA BACKUP MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE MEMORY CARD FORMAT
END ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
SELECT MODE AND HIT [SELECT] KEY
[ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
: Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system are indicated at the right end. : Function used to write data to flash memory : Function used to check the edition of a file in ROM : Function used to delete a file from flash memory : Function used to make a backup of the data stored on a memory card : Function used to make a backup of the data in SRAM
: Function used to delete a file from a memory card : Function used to format a memory card : Function used to terminate the boot system and start the CNC : Brief guidance message or error message
D Operating procedure
Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
D Basic operation Position the cursor. [UP] [DOWN]
Select a function → [SELECT]
→
Check the selection [YES] [NO]
Execute → the → Select END function
→ Return to original state
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 100
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.2.1 System Data Loading Screen Description
This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card and write it to flash memory.
Screen configuration
SYSTEM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY B0A1E01.ROM B0A1E02.ROM END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][
YES
][
1/1
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
: Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m) are displayed in n/m format at the right end. : Files on the memory card : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message
Operation (1) Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card into flash memory. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key. Up to eight file names can be listed on a single page. If nine or more files are stored on the memory card, the ninth and subsequent files are displayed on other pages. To display the next page, press the [ ] soft key. To display the previous page, press the [ ] soft key. END is displayed on the last page. (2) When a file is selected, the system prompts the operator to confirm loading of that file. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(3) To load the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 101
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
(4) When the function terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see Appendix (B). ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
Others (a) Counter display while a file is being loaded While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being accessed is displayed. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD. z ADDRESS 001:000022FF
ÃÃ ÃÃ
The counter is displayed under the message field.
: Number of the 128-KB management unit where the data being accessed is positioned in flash memory
: Relative address within the management unit (Only series 20 is indicated.)
(b) File name in flash memory The boot system uses the first four characters of the file name to identify a file in flash memory. If the file to be read from a memory card and a file already written into flash memory have names beginning with the same four characters, delete the latter from flash memory. Then, start reading the new file into flash memory. The following table lists the names and contents of files. File names may be changed without notice. D Series 16/18 File name NC BASIC DG SERVO GRAPHIC NC OPTN PMC ∗∗∗∗ PCD ∗∗∗∗ CEX ∗∗∗∗ PMC-∗∗∗∗ PMC@∗∗∗∗
Contents Basic Servo Graphic Optional PMC control software, etc. P-CODE macro file/OMM C-language executor Ladder software Loader ladder software
File type System file System file System file System file System file User file User file User file User file
A square (j) and an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character and an alphabetic character respectively. D Series 20 File name NC BASIC DG SERVO OPT LANG PCD ∗∗∗∗ PMC-∗∗∗∗
Contents Basic Servo Optional P-CODE macro file/OMM Ladder software
File type System file System file System file User file User file
An asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an alphabetic character respectively.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 102
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
D Series 21 File name NC BASIC DG SERVO GRAPHIC NC OPTN PMC ∗∗∗∗ PCD ∗∗∗∗ PMC-∗∗∗∗ PMC@∗∗∗∗
Contents Basic (:1) Servo (:1) Graphic (:1) Optional (:1) PMC control software, etc. (:1) P-CODE macro file/OMM Ladder software Loader ladder software (:2)
File type System file System file System file System file System file User file User file User file
A square (j) or an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an alphabetic character respectively. (:1) : Only for 21–MB and 21–TB (controller B) (:2) : Only for 21–TB (controller B)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 103
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.2.2 System Data Check Screen Description
This screen is used to list files in flash memory, together with the number of 128-KB management units constituting each file and the series and edition of the software.
Screen configuration
SYSTEM DATA CHECK FILE DIRECTORY 1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RA ( 1) 4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 OPT LANG( 4) END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
: Screen title. : Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. The file names are given in item G.2.1–(1). : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 104
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
Operation (1) Select the file for which details are required. For example, select ”1 NC BASIC.” (2) The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed, together with the series and edition of the software. After checking the list, press the [SELECT] soft key and return to the file selection screen. ROM FILE CHECK NC BASIC 0 B0A1 801A 000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1
801A 802A 841A 842A 881A 882A 8C1A 8C2A
000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007
Internal management unit number ROM number and edition Series
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ HIT SELECT KEY.
Others D Parity information for system file and user file The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, OPT LANG, and other system files in flash memory contain parity information in each of their management units. If the file name field or parity field on the check screen contains a non-ASCII character or @, the flash ROM may be damaged/destroyed or a damaged file may have been read. Re-read data from the memory card. The PMC-xxxx, PC-D xxxx, and other user files do not contain parity information in each of their management units. A non-ASCII character or @ may be included in the displayed series/edition information. This does not, however, indicate any abnormality.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 105
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.2.3 System Data Delete Screen Description
This screen is used to delete a user file from flash memory.
Screen configuration
SYSTEM DATA DELETE FILE DIRECTORY 1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RB ( 1) 4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 OPT LANG( 4) END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
: Screen title. : Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message
Operation (1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the [SELECT] soft key. (2) The system displays the following confirmation message: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(3) To delete the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.
(4) When the deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 106
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
Others D System file and user file on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen The SYSTEM DATA DELETE function provides a safeguard against accidental deletion of the system files. User files, however, are not protected. Protected system files can be overwritten by using the SYSTEM DATA LOADING function.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 107
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.2.4 System Data Save Screen Description
This screen is used to write a user file from flash memory to a memory card. This function supports the writing of user files only. System files cannot be written from flash memory to a memory card.
Screen configuration
SYSTEM DATA SAVE FILE DIRECTORY 1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RB ( 1) 4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 NC1 OPTN( 4) END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
: Screen title. : Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message
Operation (1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be saved, then press the [SELECT] soft key. (2) The system displays the following confirmation message: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(3) To save the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA.000
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 108
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
(4) When saving terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The name of the file written to the memory card is displayed. Check the file name. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RB.000
Others (1) Difference between a system file and user file for SYSTEM DATA SAVE SYSTEM DATA SAVE protects system files so that they cannot be copied easily. User files are not protected. (2) Names of saved files The names of the files written from flash memory to the memory card are as follows: D Series 16/18 Flash memory NC BASIC ! DG SERVO ! NC1 OPTN ! PMC-RB ! PCD 0.5M ! PCD 1.0M ! PCD 1.5M !
Memory card NC_BASIC.XXX DG_SERVO.XXX NC1_OPTN.XXX PMC–RB.XXX PCD_0.5M.XXX PCM_1.0M.XXX PCD_1.5M.XXX
D Series 20 Flash memory NC BASIC ! DG SERVO ! OPT LANG ! PMC-RA ! PCD 0.5M ! PCD 1.0M ! PCD 1.5M !
Memory card NC_BASIC.XXX DG_SERVO.XXX OPT_LANG.XXX PMC–RA.XXX PCD_0.5M.XXX PCM_1.0M.XXX PCD_1.5M.XXX
D Series 21 Flash memory NC BASIC ! DG SERVO ! NC1 OPTN ! PMC-RA ! PCD 128k ! PCD 256k ! PCD 0.5M ! PCD 1.0M !
Memory card NC_BASIC.XXX DG_SERVO.XXX NC1_OPTN.XXX PMC–RA.XXX PCD_128k.XXX PCD_256k.XXX PCD_0.5M.XXX PCM_1.0M.XXX
XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names. One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. For example, if a PMC-RB file in flash memory is saved to a memory card containing no PMC_RB.* files, the saved file is named PMC_RB.000. If that same file is saved to a memory card that already contains a PMC_RB.000 file, however, it is named PMC_RB.001. In this way, the extension is incremented by one, up to PMC_RB.031. If there are any free extension numbers in the sequence of the extension numbers, they are used in ascending order. If two or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are saved to a single memory card, check the file names displayed after saving. In the case of Serics 20, to write a P-CODE macro file, with a password assigned by MLINK, from flash memory to a memory card, the password must be entered. The macro password is explained in Sec.G.4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 109
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.2.5 SRAM Data Backup Screen Description
This screen is used for the batch saving and restoring of parameters, programs, and other data to be retained after the CNC is turned off to/from a memory card.
Screen configuration
Select ”4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” from the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.
SYSTEM DATA BACKUP
1. SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD ) 2. RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC ) END
SRAM SIZE FILE NAME
: :
512K( BASIC ) SRAM_5A.FDB
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
: Screen title. : Menu : Option for returning to the previous menu : Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC : File name : Message
Operation
[Backing up data] (1) Select ”1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message is displayed. To back up the data, press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(2) The FILE NAME: field displays the name of the file that is being written to the memory card. The writing time depends on the amount of free space on the memory card. Generally, to write the SRAM BASIC file (512KB) takes about 2 minutes.
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
SRAM SIZE : 0.5M( BASIC ) FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.000!MEMORY CARD
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 110
z Name of file that is being backed up.
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
[Restoring data] (1) Select ”2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the following message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(2) The system displays the following message while the file is being restored. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.
(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
Others (1) Name of a backup file The name of a backup file written to a memory card by the SRAM backup function depends on the size of the SRAM in the CNC. D Series 16/18 The backup file is divided every 512KB. Size of SRAM
File number
0.5MB
1.0MB
1.5MB
2.5MB
1
SRAM0_5A.FDB
SRAM1_0A.FDB
SRAM1_5A.FDB
SRAM2_5A.FDB
SRAM1_0B.FDB
SRAM1_5B.FDB
SRAM2_5B.FDB
2 3
SRAM1_5C.FDB SRAM2_5C.FDB
4
SRAM2_5D.FDB
5
SRAM2_5E.FDB
D Series 20, 21 Size of SRAM
File name on the memory card
128KB
SRAM128K.XXX
256KB
SRAM256K.XXX
256KB
SRAM256K.XXX
512KB
SRAM512K.XXX
CNC Series 20 Series 21
XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names. One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. The number is assigned as described in the section describing the use of the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen. If two or more files are normally saved, check the file names displayed after saving.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 111
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.2.6 Memory Card File Delete Screen Description
This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.
Screen configuration
SYSTEM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY B0A1E01.ROM B0A1E02.ROM
1/1
END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
: Screen title. The current page number (n) and the total number of pages (m) are displayed in n/m format at the right-hand end. : Files on the memory card : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message
Operation (1) Select the name of the file to be deleted from the memory card by pressing the [SELECT] key. (2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(3) Upon normal deletion of the file, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
Others D When nine or more files are stored to the memory card Display the desired page, by following the procedure in the section describing the use of the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 112
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
G.2.7 Memory Card Format Function Description
This function is used to format a memory card. A memory card must be formatted before it can be used for the first time or before it is to be re-used after its data has been lost as a result of its battery failing or similar reasons.
Operation (1) On the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select ”7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT.” (2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(3) The system displays the following message while formatting a memory card: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.
(4) Upon the completion of formatting, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 113
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.2.8 End of Boot System
Description
This function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.
Operation
On the MAIN MENU screen, select ”9. END.” The system displays the ”ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate the boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. If the [NO] key is pressed, the boot system is not terminated. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
(1) After the [YES] soft key is pressed D The system checks the NC BASIC system file in flash memory. At this time, the system displays the following message: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
D If the NC BASIC system file is normal, the system reads the system file into DRAM (for Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, or 20) then starts the NC basic system. During reading, the following message blinks: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING BASIC TO DRAM [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
D Upon the completion of loading, the following message appears, after which NC BASIC starts. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ CNC DATA LOADED [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
D If the contents of the NC BASIC system file have been damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection screen, in the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed. (2) If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing selection screen, shown below: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT [SELECT] KEY. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 114
]
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS
The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical order.
Message D
Description and required action
DELETE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Action
Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the flash ROM module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x)
Cause
An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Action
Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce the flash ROM module.
D–RAM OR S–RAM PARITY
F
Cause
Invalid data was found in the RAM area.
Action
If an attempt is made to back RAM that has never been cleared, this message appears. When this happens, the boot system may stop.
FILE SAVE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.
Action
Check that the memory card is not damaged. (NOTE)
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE
Cause
There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file. Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.
Action
For the Series 20, if this message is displayed and a file cannot be read although the result of calculation indicates that the flash memory has enough space, see Section G.5, ”Free Area of the Flash Memory.”
FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause HIT SELECT. Action
I
The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system. Put the flash ROM module on the board.
FORMAT ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
The formatting of the memory card failed.
Action
Only a memory card of the SRAM type can be used. Check whether the memory card used is of the flash memory type.
ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE
Cause
The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.
Action
The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed.
Cause
Error in the password specification
Action
Key in the correct password.
Cause
An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.
Action
Do not touch the memory card while loading data.
INCORRECT PASSWORD
L
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
LOADING ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
NOTE Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 115
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
Message M
MAX EXTENSION OVER. HIT SELECT KEY.
Description and required action Cause
The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.
Action
Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause HIT SELECT. Action
R
The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Replace the battery.
MEMORY CARD FULL. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
The memory card is full.
Action
Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another card having sufficient free space.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY
Cause
The memory card could not be accessed.
Action
Check that the memory card is normal.
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
The memory card is not inserted into its slot.
Action
Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause SELECT KEY.
N
B–66102E/10
Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write inhibit switch is set.
Action
Disable the write inhibit switch.
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
Access to a memory card failed.
Action
The memory card’s battery may have gone dead, the memory card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory card may not be inserted in the slot securely.
MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
Access to the memory card has failed.
Action
Check whether the memory card is defective.
NMI OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.
Cause
A hardware or software error occurred.
Action
Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot software.
ROM PARITY ERROR: NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.
Cause
The NC BASIC is parity error.
Action
Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM DATA CHECK.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 116
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Message S
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
Description and required action
SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.
Action
Check that the memory card is normal.
SRAMXXXX * NOT FOUND. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
A backup file of the SRAM with a capacity of XXX cannot be found.
Action
A backup file is required for restoration.
Cause
A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM (Caution).
Action
The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If, however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup battery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area. If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hardware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not accessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any problems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however, reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be detected during backup although the CNC operates without any problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, however, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recommended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is performed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.
SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 117
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.4 SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (Series 20) G.4.1 Overview
The Series 20 can easily read a file from flash memory and write it to a memory card. Security for the P-CODE file of a user-created macro executor is important. Assigning a password to the P-CODE file at a link (MLINK) affords security against the unauthorized reading of that file. MLINK of personal computer compiler V02.3 or later, which supports a function for specifying a password is used to achieve this.
G.4.2 Password
Specify a single five-digit password, each of the digits being from 1 to 5. A number greater than or equal to 6 or 0 cannot be specified for the password. Only five digits can be specified. If passwords are not used, avoid coding PASS= in the MLINK link control file, described later. Characters that can be specified: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Number of digits: 5 If a password that does not satisfy these requirements is specified, the system displays the following error message: ERROR: Illegal parameter is specified:PASS=XXXXX The system stops MLINK processing.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 118
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
G.4.3 Setting a Password
Specify a password in the MLINK link control file (extension .LNK). The five digits immediately subsequent to PASS= constitute the password. In the example below, the password is 15243. (Example) /: /:
MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE (SAMPLE)
/: /: CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F20M.MEX /: P9001=0000001 P9010=100 P9037=5 P9038=8000 /: JIKKOU-MACRO FILE=ABC,DEF FILE=XYZ,UVW /: FILE=SSS /: P-CODE FILE PASSWORD PASS=15243
G.4.4 Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System
The Series 20 boot system can read a macro executor P-CODE file having the password from flash memory only when the password is entered. INPUT PASSWORD. ????? The system displays the message and assigns numbers 1 to 5 to the soft keys. When a valid password is entered, the P-CODE file can be written to a memory card.
1
zSoft keys
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 119
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
G.5 FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (Series 20)
G.5.1 Determining the Cause of the No–space State
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
When the NO SPACE message is displayed, flash memory is in one of the following two states: (1) Flash memory is fully occupied. (2) Flash memory contains files in non-contiguous areas. In flash memory, only continuous free areas are recognized as free areas. Non-contiguous free areas may be ignored as described in (2) above.
Using the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen, check the capacity of the flash memory module installed in the Series 20. Module size
Number of management units
2MB
16
3MB
24
4MB
32
Total the number of management units constituting the files in flash memory and subtract the total from the number of management units corresponding to the capacity of the installed flash memory module.
Number of free management units= Number of management units corresponding – Total number of management to module capacity unitsconstituting all files
The number of management units constituting each file is given in following table. File name
Number of management units
Contents
NC BASIC
Basic
10
OPT LANG
Option
4
DG SERVO
Servo
1
PMC-RA
Lodder
1
PCD 0.5M
P-CODE macro file (0.5M byte)
4
PCD 1.0M
P-CODE macro file (1.0M byte)
8
PCD 1.5M
P-CODE macro file (1.5M byte)
12
If a NO SPACE error message is displayed even though calculation indicates that flash memory contains sufficient free management units, then the free area in flash memory is non-contiguous. For example, if the files are read to a 3MB flash memory module (24 management units) in the order in which they are listed below, the module will have four free management units.
24 Number of management units in the module
–
20 Total number of management units used
=
4 Number of free management units
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 120
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RA
( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 OPT LANG( 4)
The files are written into the 3MB flash memory module as shown below: Before deletion (continuous free area)
Management unit number
After deletion (non-continuous free areas)
Management unit number
File
000 :
NC BASIC :
:
:
:
:
009
NC BASIC
10
009
NC BASIC
10
010
DG SERVO
1
010
DG SERVO
1
011
PMC-RA
1
011
PMC-RA
1
012
PCD 0.5M
1
012
Free
013
PCD 0.5M
2
013
Free
014
PCD 0.5M
3
014
Free
015
PCD 0.5M
4
015
Free
016
OPT LANG
1
016
OPT LANG
1
017
OPT LANG
2
017
OPT LANG
2
018
OPT LANG
3
018
OPT LANG
3
019
OPT LANG
4
019
OPT LANG
4
020
Free
020
Free
021
Free
020
Free
022
Free
020
Free
023
Free
020
Free
1
000
File
NC BASIC
1
Noncontiguous free areas
If P-CODE macro file PCD 0.5M is deleted, eight management units (1MB) become free in flash memory. As the free management units are separated in flash memory, the 1-MB P-CODE macro file PCD 1.0M cannot be read into flash memory. (Use the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen to determine whether the management unit numbers of the files are contiguous.) If non-contiguous free areas are found, use the SYSTEM DATA SAVE function to save the OPT LANG file, sandwiched between two free areas, to a memory card. Then, delete the OPT LANG file from flash memory. Re-read the file from the memory card into flash memory. The file will now be placed next to the PMC-RA file, with a continuous free area of 1MB reserved. NOTE The OPT LANG system file is deleted in this example only for ease of explanation. Actually, the user cannot delete a system file.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 121
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
H
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
H.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 H.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 H.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 122
B–66102E/10
H.1 OVERVIEW
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAM→DRAM), then starts it so that software can be executed. The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the CNC: (1) Registering a file in flash ROM ⋅ Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM. (2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM (3) Deleting a file from flash ROM (4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card (5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card (6) Formatting of a memory card (7) Deleting a file from a memory card This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the screen displays and operation for the functions listed above. CAUTION This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an input/output device. When a flash card is used, however, data can be written to a FANUC–recommended card only. Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced by 128KB. See the order list for details of the supported memory card types.
H.1.1 Starting the Boot System
In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers files from flash ROM to DRAM in the background. The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system must be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is to be carried out or when the flash ROM does not contain a required file. 1 In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft keys at the right end.
Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.
If soft keys are not provided (for example, when a touch pad is being used), use the MDI numeric keys. Hold down the 6 keys until the boot system screen appears.
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 123
and 7
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start the CNC Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts transferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, a file required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash ROM or has been destroyed, the boot system is automatically started.
H.1.2 System Files and User Files
The boot system organizes files in flash ROM into two main groups : system files and user files. These two file types have the following characteristics :
D System files
CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
D User files
PMC sequence program (ladder), P–CODE macro program, and other user–created files
H.1.3
When CAP–II board or LCB (loader control board) is mounted on the CNC, we have to access to SRAM that mounted on additional board. So, the boot system displays BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen that to select a access board.
Boot Slot Configuration Screen D Screen configuration
(1) (2)
(3)
BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION NO. 0. 1. 2. 3.
BOARD MAIN PMC–RE CAP–II LCB
F–ROM 4MB 6MB
60M1–02
SRAM 1.0MB 256KB 512KB 512KB
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
]
(1) : Screen title. (2) : Flash memory size and SRAM size of each board. (3) : Message D Operation
Press the [ UP ] or [DOWN] soft key to move the cursor, and select board to press the [SELECT] soft key.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 124
H.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is displayed. This screen is described below :
D MAIN MENU screen (1)
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
(9)
10.END
(10)
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
60M1-01
SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA DELETE SYSTEM DATA SAVE SRAM DATA BACKUP MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE MEMORY CARD FORMAT
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
]
(1) : Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system appear at the right end. (2) : Function for writing data to flash ROM. (3) : Function for checing the edition of a file in ROM. (4) : Function for deleting a file from flash ROM. (5) : Function for making a backup copy of the data stored on the memory card.
(6) : Function for making a backup copy of the data in SRAM. (7) : Function for deleting a file from a memory card. (8) : Function for formatting a memory card. (9) : Function for terminating the boot system and starting the CNC. (10): Condensed guidance or error message D Operating procedure
Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
D Basic operation
Position the cursor. [UP] [DOWN]
Select a function → [SELECT]
→
Check the selection [YES] [NO]
Execute → the → Select END function
→ Return to original state
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 125
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
H.2.1 System Data Loading Screen D Description
This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card into flash ROM.
D Screen configuration
(1)
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
(2)
FILE DIRECTORY B1F1A_B.MEM B1F1A_AI.MEM END
(3)
1/1
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ (4)
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
]
(1) : Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end. (2) : Files on the memory card (3) : Option for returning to previous menu Message (4) : Message D Operating procedure
1 Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card and written to flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key. A single page can list up to eight file names. If the memory card contains nine or more files, the remaining files are displayed on another page. To display the next page, press the To display the previous page, press the is displayed on the last page.
soft key. soft key. The END option
The END option is displayed on the last page. 2 After a file has been slected, the system asks whether that file is to be loaded. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 126
B–66102E/10
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see D.3 ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
D Others 1 Counter display while a file is being loaded While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being accessed is displayed. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD. ADDRESS 001: ² The counter appears under the message fild. (1) (1) : Number of 128–KB management unit in flash ROM 2 File name in flash ROM The boot system identifies a file in flash ROM by the first four characters of the ID in the header. If flash ROM has a file of the same type as a file to be read from the memory card, the file in flash ROM is deleted before the file on the memory card is read. The following table lists the IDs in the header and the contents. Note that these IDs are subject to change without prior notice. File name NC BASIC DG SERVO GRAPHIC NCj OPTN PMCj∗∗∗∗ PDj∗jjj∗ P1j∗jjj∗ P2j∗jjj∗ CEX ∗∗∗∗ PMC - ∗∗∗∗ PMC@∗∗∗∗
Contents Basic Servo Graphic Optional PMC control software, etc. 1st executor 2nd executor 3rd executor C–language executor (Except Series 21i) Ladder software Ladder software for the loader
File type System file System file System file System file System file User file User file User file User file User file User file
V : A numeric character, * : An alphabetic character
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 127
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
3 File name of the executor system software The Series 16i/18i/21i–A has separate executor system software for path 1, path 2, and the loader. All the software is stored in the flash ROM of the first path. Under two–path control with the Series 16–C and the like, a common executor system software file name (PCD1.0M, for example) is used for different paths. The Series 16i/18i/21i, however, use separate file names for different paths. Accordingly, keyword SYSTEM has been added to the link control file of the macro compiler. (See Section 4.2, ”Macro Linker.”) The following format is used for the file name in the flash ROM. (1) Format of the file name in the flash ROM Format PD“path-number” “attribute” “size” Standard : Depends on the compile parameter S–CAP : A fixed value is embedded. M : M series T : T series L : Loader
First executor (Standard/Super CAP)
1 : First path 2 : Second path P1“path-number” “attribute” “size” Depends on the compile parameter Second executor (Super CAP only)
M : M series T : T series 1 : First path 2 : Second path P2“path-number” “attribute” “size” Depends on the compile parameter
Third executor (Super CAP only)
M : M series T : T series 1 : First path 2 : Second path
(2) File name types in the flash ROM F–ROM file name
Description
PD1M“size” PD2M“size”
First path of M series (first executor) Second path of M series (first executor)
PD1T“size” PD2T“size”
First path of T series (first executor) Second path of T series (first executor)
PD1L“size”
First path of loader
P11M“size” P12M“size”
First path of M series (second executor) Second path of M series (second executor)
P21M“size” P22M“size”
First path of M series (third executor) Second path of M series (third executor)
P11T“size” P12T“size”
First path of T series (second executor) Second path of T series (second executor)
P21T“size” P22T“size”
First path of T series (third executor) Second path of T series (third executor)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 128
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
H.2.2 System Data Check Screen D Description
This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with the corresponding numbers of 128–KB management units in each file and the series and edition of the software.
D Screen configuration (1) (2) (3)
(4)
SYSTEM DATA CHECK [BOARD:MAIN] FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB) 1 NC BASIC ( 10) 2 DG SERVO ( 1) 3 PMC0BSC ( 2) 4 PMC–RB ( 1) 5 PCD 0.5M ( 4) END
1/1
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ (5)
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
]
(1) : Screen title (2) : Names of accessing board (3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. (4) : Returning to the previous menu (5) : Message
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 129
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
D Operating procedure
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select “1 NC BASIC (10).” 2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed, together with the series and edition of the software in each management unit. After checking the listed data, select the [SELECT] soft key to return to the file selection screen. ROM FILE CHECK NC BASIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1
801A 802A 841A 842A 881A 882A 8C1A 8C2A
000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
0 B1F1 801A 000
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Internal management–unit number ROM number and edition Series
HIT SELECT KEY.
D Others
Parity information for the system file and user file The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, and other system files in flash ROM contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name field or parity field on the check screen contains a non–ASC II character or an “@” , the flash ROM may have been destroyed or a damaged file may have been read. Re–read the data from the memory card. The PMC–RB, PCD 0.5M, and other user files do not contain parity information in each management unit. A non–ASCII character or an “@” may appear in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not indicate that the file has been damaged.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 130
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
H.2.3 System Data Delete Screen D Description
This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM.
D Screen configuration
(4)
SYSTEM DATA CHECK [BOARD:MAIN] FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB) 1 NC BASIC ( 10) 2 DG SERVO ( 1) 3 PMC0BSC ( 2) 4 PMC–RB ( 1) 5 PCD 0.5M ( 4) END
(5)
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
(1) (2) (3)
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
1/1
][
DOWN
]
(1) : Screen title (2) : Names of accessing board (3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. (4) : Returning to the previous menu (5) : Message D Operating procedure
1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the [SELECT] soft key. 2 The system displays the following confirmation message : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 To start the deletion, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO]. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.
4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 131
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
D Others
APPENDIX
1
B–66102E/10
System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files, however, are not protected. Protected system files can be overwritten from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
H.2.4 System Data Save Screen D Description
This screen is used to write a user file in flash ROM to a memory card. Only user files can be saved from flash ROM to a memory card. System files cannot be saved.
D Screen configuration (1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
SYSTEM DATA SAVE [BOARD:MAIN] FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB) 1 NC BASIC ( 10) 2 DG SERVO ( 1) 3 PMC0BSC ( 2) 4 PMC–RB ( 1) 5 PCD 0.5M ( 4) END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
]
(1) : Screen title (2) : Names of accessing board (3) : Names of files in flash memory The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. (4) : Returning to the previous menu (5) : Message
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 132
D Operating procedure
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
1
Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
2
The system displays the following confirmation message : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3
To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO]. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000
4
When saving terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files written to the memory card are listed. Check the file names by, for example, making a note of the list. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000
D Others
1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against free copying of the system files. User files, however, are not protected. 2 Names of saved files Files saved from flash ROM to a memory card have the following names : Flash ROM
PMC–RB PD1M 0.5 P12T 1.0 CEX1.0M CEX 2.0M
File name in Memory card ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
PMC_RB. XXX PD1M 05.XXX P12T 10.XXX CEX_10M.XXX CEX_20M.XXX
XXX corresponds to the file extension of MS–DOS format files. A number from 000 to 031 is specified for XXX. For example, if the PMC–RB file in flash ROM is saved to a memory card that does not yet contain a file whose name begins with “PMC–RB”, the saved file is named PMC–RB.000. If, however, that file is saved to a memory card that already contains a file named PMC–RB.000, the saved file is named PMC–RB.001. As files are added, the extension is incremented up to a maximum of PMC–RB.031. Any no–longer used numbers in the sequence of the extension numbers are used in as cending order. If two or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are normally saved to the memory card, check the file names displayed subsequently.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 133
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
H.2.5 SRAM Data Backup Screen D Description
This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs, and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, to and from a memory card.
D Screen configuration
Select “4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen. The following screen is displayed. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
(1) : (2) : (3) : (4) : (5) : (6) : (7) :
SRAM DATA BACKUP [BOARD:MAIN] 1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC ³ MEMORY CARD) 2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD ³ CNC) END SRAM SIZE FILE NAME
: :
256K (BASIC) SRAM256A. FDB
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
Screen title Names of accessing board Menu Returning to the previous menu Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC File name Message
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 134
]
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
D Operating procedure [Backing up data]
1 Select “1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message is displayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to the SRAM capacity. 2 Press [YES] to start backup. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 If a backup file is already on the memory card, you will be prompted to confirm whether to permit overwriting. 4 The name of the file being written to the memory card is displayed in the FILE NAME: field. SRAM SIZE FILE NAME
: 0.5MB (BASIC) : SRAM0_5A.FDB ³ MEMORY CARD
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
Name of the file being saved
SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.
5 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
[Restoring the data]
1 Select “2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the following message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
2 The system displays the following message during restoration. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.
3 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 135
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
D Others
B–66102E/10
1 Name of backup file The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAM backup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in the CNC. When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created in units of 512 KB.
Number of files SRAM size
1
2
3
4
256KB
SRAM256A.FDB
0.5MB
SRAM0_5A.FDB
1.0MB
SRAM1_0A.FDB
SRAM1_0B.FDB
2.0MB
SRAM2_0A.FDB
SRAM2_0B.FDB
SRAM2_0C.FDB
SRAM2_0D.FDB
3.0MB
SRAM3_0A.FDB
SRAM3_0B.FDB
SRAM3_0C.FDB
SRAM3_0D.FDB
5
6
SRAM3_0E.FDB
SRAM3_0F.FDB
The backup file for SRAM on the PMC–RE, CAPII, or LCB board will have the following extension: Board
MAIN
PMC–RE
CAPII
LCB
Extension
FDB
PMC
CAP
LCB
CAUTION If data such as parameters was restored from a memory card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder, set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0, and set the reference point again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 136
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
H.2.6 Memory Card File Delete Screen D Description
This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.
D Screen configuration (1) (2) (3)
(4)
SRAM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY B1F1A_B.MEM B1F1A_A1.MEM END
1/1
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
]
(1) : Screen title. Tlhe current page number (n) and the total number of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end. (2) : Files on the memory card (3) : Option for returning to the previous menu (4) : Message D Operating procedure
1 Press the [SELECT] key to select the name of the file to be deleted from the memory card. 2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 When a file has been deleted normally, display the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 137
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
H.2.7 Memory Card Format Function D Description
This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must be formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can be re–used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for example, battery failure.
D Operating procedure
1 From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select “7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT.” 2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 The system displays the following message during formatting : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.
4 When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the D following message. D Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 138
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
H.2.8 Load Basic System Function D Description
The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.
D Operating procedure
From the MAIN MENU screen, select “9. END.” The system displays the “ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate the boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the [NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
1 After pressing the [YES] soft key The system checks the NC BASIC system file in the flash ROM. The system displays the following message : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM. [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
When the NC BASIC system file is found to be normal, the system sends the system file to DRAM and starts the NC basic system. During loading, the system blinks the following message. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING BASIC TO DRAM [ SELECT ][
YES
][
NO
][
UP
][
DOWN
]
If the contents of the NC BASIC SYSTEM file are found to have been damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection state, in exactly the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed. 2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing selection state as shown below : SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
60M1-01
SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA DELETE SYSTEM DATA SAVE SRAM DATA BACKUP MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE MEMORY CARD FORMAT
10.END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP
][
DOWN
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 139
]
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
H.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS
APPENDIX
The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical order.
Message B
C
D
F
BOOT ROM PARITY. PLEASE POWER OFF.
Description and required action Cause
The contents of flash memory containing boot software was destroyed.
Action
Replace the CPU card.
Cause
The memory card becomes full in the middle of SRAM backup operation.
Action
Replace the card with a memory card containing enough free space.
DELETE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Action
Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the flash ROM module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x)
Cause
An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Action
Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce the flash ROM module.
Cause
An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.
Action
Check that the memory card is not damaged.
Note)
Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.
CHANGE MEMORY CARD. AND HIT YES OR NO.
FILE SAVE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE
Cause
There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file.
Action
Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.
FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause HIT SELECT. Action I
L
B–66102E/10
ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE
The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system. Put the flash ROM module on the board.
Cause
The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.
Action
The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed.
ILLEGAL FROM MODULE. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
The flash ROM module ID is illegal.
Action
Check the drawing No. of the flash ROM module.
ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
The SRAM module ID is illegal.
Action
Check the drawing No. of the SRAM module.
LOADING ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.
Action
Do not touch the memory card while loading data.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 140
Message M
MAX EXTENSION OVER. HIT SELECT KEY.
Description and required action Cause
The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.
Action
Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause HIT SELECT. Action
P
The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Replace the battery.
MEMORY CARD FULL. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
The memory card is full.
Action
Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another card having sufficient free space.
MEMORY CARD IS NOT AVAILABLE. HIT SEL.
Cause
The use of this memory card is not supported.
Action
Use only FANUC–recommended memory cards, as described in the order list.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY
Cause
The memory card could not be accessed.
Action
Check that the memory card is normal.
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
The memory card is not inserted into its slot.
Action
Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause SELECT KEY.
N
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write inhibit switch is set.
Action
Disable the write inhibit switch.
Note)
Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.
MEMORY CARD TYPE IS NOT Cause AVAILABLE.
Write has been attempted to an incompatible flash memory card.
Action
Use only the flash ROM cards recommended by FANUC. Recommended flash ROM cards are listed in the ordering list.
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
Access to a memory card failed.
Action
The memory card’s battery may have gone dead, the memory card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory card may not be inserted in the slot securely.
MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
Access to the memory card has failed.
Action
Check whether the memory card is defective.
Note)
Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.
NMI OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.
Cause
A hardware or software error occurred.
Action
Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot software.
PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE Cause CARD.HIT SEL.
It is not possible to delete only specific files from a flash ROM card, due to the characteristics of the memory used.
Action
To delete a file it is necessary to delete all files on the card, by using the FORMAT function.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 141
H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
APPENDIX
Message R
S
B–66102E/10
Description and required action
ROM PARITY ERROR: NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.
Cause
The NC BASIC is parity error.
Action
Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM DATA CHECK.
SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.
Cause
An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.
Action
Check that the memory card is normal.
Note)
Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.
Cause
A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM (Caution).
Action
The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If, however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup battery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area. If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hardware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not accessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any problems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however, reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be detected during backup although the CNC operates without any problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, however, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recommended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is performed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.
SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 142
B–66102E/10
I
APPENDIX
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 21-TA, Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 143
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
I.1 OUTLINE
The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function also supports writing to flash ROM (exclude of Series 21–TA). The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface. The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file (loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The parameters must be specified prior to loading. When the CNC is turned off then back on by simultaneously pressing the CAN
and
PROG
MDI keys, this function displays the specialized data
transfer screen (loading screen). If Series 16/18–B/C having two–path control is used, the loading screen is displayed after tool post 1 or 2 is selected from the tool post selection screen. Data can be transferred only when the loading screen is displayed. Specify data transfer from the PC. For details of the transfer command, see Section 4.3. While this function is being executed, the CNC power-on sequence is halted. While the specialized data transfer screen or loading screen is displayed, the CNC is disabled. This function requires the executor function and reader/punch control function.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 144
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
I.2 PROCESSING BY P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(1)
RAM initialization screen
(2)
Loading start screen
(3)
Loading screen
(4)
Loading end screen
(5)
Flash ROM transfer screen (exclude of 21–TA)
(6)
Flash ROM transfer end screen (exclude of 21–TA)
I.2.1 Starting the P-code Loader Function
(1) The communication parameters for loading depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. Specify the channel to be used, the baud rate, and any other necessary parameters beforehand. (2) Turn off the power of the CNC. Connect the CNC to the PC via the RS-232C interface. (3) Simultaneously pressing the
CAN
and
PROG
MDI keys of the CNC
turns the CNC on. Keep these keys held down until the MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTOR P-CODE LOADER title appears on the screen.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 145
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
I.2.2 RAM Initialization Screen
When a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection screen is displayed subsequent to the title screen, as shown below. By pressing the M or S address key, select path 1 or 2. If the 0 key is pressed, P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the Series 16/18–B/C system is activated. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
LOADING PATH 1 : YES (PUSH M KEY) LOADING PATH 2 : YES (PUSH S KEY) LOADING END : YES (PUSH 0 KEY)
Series with two-path control is being used
When a system other than Series with two-path control is used, the following screen is displayed. The macro executor RAM is initialized. If a Series with two-path control is used, the following screen is displayed after either path is selected. Then, the macro executor RAM is initialized. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER PATH 1/PATH 2 (I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
z This line is displayed only for two– path control. The same applies to the subsequent screens.
(MAPPING - 1MB)
OMM D-RAM INITIALIZE
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 146
B–66102E/10
I.2.3
APPENDIX
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
After the RAM is initialized, the screen for starting loading is displayed.
Loading Start Screen MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
LOADING READY ? : YES (PUSH 1 KEY)
Once the PC is ready for data transfer, press the 1 key. The system enters the loading wait state. After this screen has been displayed, execute the data transfer command on the PC, then start data transfer. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADR000000H:00 (MAPPING - 1MB)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 147
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
I.2.4 Loading Screen
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as shown below. Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together with its address, are displayed. For Series except 21–TA, an asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 16K bytes for DRAM areas of up to 2M bytes or about 32K bytes for DRAM areas of up to 3M bytes. For Series 21-TA, an asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 8K bytes. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
∗∗∗∗
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 148
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
I.2.5 Loading End Screen
This screen indicates whether loading has terminated normally. (Normal termination) (1) Except Series 21–TA Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗
LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxxBYTES LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? :YES(1)/NO(CAN) YES (PUSH 1 KEY) / NO (PUSH CAN KEY)
: Writing to flash ROM is started. NO (PUSH CAN KEY) : The processing is terminated. Specify whether to start writing to the flash ROM. To start transferring data from RAM to the flash ROM, press the 1 key. (See Subsec. I.2.6.) If the (CAN) MDI key is pressed, the following screen is displayed. YES (PUSH 1 KEY)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗
PUSH 1 KEY: CNC START WITH EXECUTER
When the 1 key is pressed, the P-CODE loader function is terminated and the CNC is started. If a Series with two-path control is being used, the following message is displayed. To return to the path selection screen, press the 1 key.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 149
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER HEAD 1 (I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB) ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ I/O UNIT = 0 BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗ STOP BIT = 1 INPUT CODE = 1
PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION
(2) For the 21-TA Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears. Pressing the 1 key on this screen causes the P-CODE loader processing to be terminated and the CNC to be started. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER HEAD 1 (I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB) I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗ STOP BIT = 1 INPUT CODE = 1
PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER
If an error occurs during loading, the following error message is displayed. To retry loading, press the 1 key. (The processing is repeated, starting from RAM initialization.) When you press CAN key and numeric ”1” key on the MDI keyboard, the P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the CNC is started. If a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection screen is displayed again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 150
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
(Abnormal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
(ERROR OCCURED) ILLEGAL CHARACTER
LOADING RESTART ?
: YES (PUSH 1 KEY) : NO (PUSH CAN KEY)
: Re-loading into RAM is started. : The processing is terminated. Specify whether to start re-loading into RAM. If the executor or reader/punch control function is not selected, the following message is displayed. YES (PUSH 1 KEY) NO
(PUSH CAN KEY)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING I/O OPTION NOTHING I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START
Press the 1 key to terminate the P-CODE loader processing and start the CNC.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 151
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
I.2.6 Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
While data is being transferred from RAM to the flash ROM, the following screen is displayed: MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗
LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING
While data is being written to flash ROM, the EXECUTING message blinks.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 152
B–66102E/10
I.2.7 Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21)
APPENDIX
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
This screen indicates whether the data transfer to flash ROM terminated normally. (Normal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗
LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER
Press the 1 key to terminate P-CODE processing and start the CNC. If a Series with two–path control is being used, the following message is displayed. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗
LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION
Press the 1 key to return to the path selection screen. If an attempt to load data into flash ROM fails, the following error message is displayed. To start re-loading into flash ROM, press the 1 key. Press the CAN key and then 1 key on the MDI keyboard to terminate the P-CODE loader processing and start the CNC. The P-CODE previously loaded into DRAM is effective. If a Series with two-path control is being used, the tool post selection screen is displayed again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 153
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
(Abnormal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1
(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗
(ERROR OCCURED) UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED
LOADING RESTART ?
: YES(PUSH 1 KEY) : NO (PUSH CAN KEY)
: Re-loading into flash ROM is started. : The processing is terminated. Specify whether to start re-loading into the flash ROM. YES (PUSH 1 KEY) NO
(PUSH CAN KEY)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 154
B–66102E/10
I.2.8 Notes
APPENDIX
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
(1) The Series except 21–TA uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and output during loading. The Series except 21–TA cannot use another channel for loading. The Series 21-TA use channel 1. (2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not supported. The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether ASCII or ISO data is being used. (3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters cannot be specified using the loading screen. (4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the P-CODE section is transferred. (5) When no data is written to the FLASH ROM or data is deleted from the FLASH ROM, set the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so that the data including the executor section is loaded.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 155
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
I.3 PARAMETER
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 0020
I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I / O C H A N N E L
Setting Entry [Data type] : Byte [Data range] : 0 to 3 Select an I/ O device used. 0 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 1 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 2 : Select a device connected to channel 2. (Except Series 21–TA) (I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD) I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2. NOTE The Series 21-TA use channel 1. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
0101
[Data type] SB2 ASI
#3
#2
ASI
#1
#0 SB2
: Bit : Number of stop bits: 0 : 1 bit 1 : 2 bits : Input data code: 0 : ISO 1 : ASCII
NOTE EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER. Address 0102
Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)
[Data type] : Byte Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according to Table 1. Table 1 Set value
Specification of I/O device
0 1 2 3
RS–232–C FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1) FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H Unused Portable tape reader FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL G FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H
4 5 6
Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 156
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 0103
Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)
[Data type] : Byte Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2. Table 2 Set
Baud rate
Set
1
50
5
2
100
3 4
Baud rate
Set
Baud rate
20
9
2400
6
300
10
4800
110
7
600
11
9600
150
8
1200
12
19200
Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for P-CODE LOADER. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
0111
#3
#2
#1
ASI
#0 SB2
[Data type] : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit is the same as parameter No. 0101. Address 0112
Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)
[Data type] : Byte Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 1. Address 0113
Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=1 )
[Data type] : Byte Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2. Bit No. Address 0121
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
ASI
#1
#0 SB2
[Data type] : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each bit is the same as parameter No. 101. Address 0122
Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)
[Data type] : Byte Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 1.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 157
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 0123
Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=2 )
[Data type] : Byte Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
8701
[Data type] PLD
#1 PLD
: Bit : P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer 0 : Clears RAM and rewrites all contents. 1 : Do not clear RAM and overwrites it.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 158
#0
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
I.4 ALARMS Message EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING OR NO SPACE IN D-RAM
Meaning Possible causes are as follows: 1) No macro executor option has been selected. 2) No macro capacity option has been selected. 3) An area of the capacity specified with the macro capacity option cannot be allocated in D-RAM. 4) The area allocated with the macro capacity option is being used by the C executor.
I/O OPTION NOTHING
Reader/puncher control 1 option is not selected.
I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING
Reader/puncher control 2 option is not selected.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL
A channel other than channel 1 and 2 is selected.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER
Transferred data is not correct.
OVERRUN
Overrun error.
FRAMING ERROR
Framing error.
DSR SIGNAL OFF
Communication error.
PARITY ERROR
Data with no parity was transferred.
CHECK SUM ERROR
Check sum error.
MEXE NOT FOUND
No executer part exists. Execute loading including executer part.
FILE SIZE OVER
The size of P-CODE to be loaded exceeds the size of D-RAM.
HEADER NOT FOUND
There is no header that is used for writing data in F-ROM. There may be no ”-s” instruction in transfer command.
UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED
F-ROM module is unknown or not mounted.
ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION
F-ROM file ID is incorrect.
NO SPACE
There is no space in F- ROM module.
ERASE ERROR
Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.
PROGRAM ERROR
Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 159
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
J
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function also supports writing to flash ROM. The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface. The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file (loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The parameters must be specified prior to loading. Display an IPL menu by turning on the power while pressing the two most lefthand soft keys. The P-code loader function can be executed on the IPL menu.
Press and hold down these two soft keys.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 160
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
J.1 IPL MENU FS20 IPL MENU 1 2 END
FILE CLEAR P CODE LOADER
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT ITEM AND HIT [SELECT] KEY. [
UP
][
DOWN
][
][
][ SELECT ]
(a) Select a mode by pressing the [UP] and [DOWN] soft keys, then press the [SELECT] soft key. 1.
FILE CLEAR
: Clears files such as offsets and programs 2. P CODE LOADER : Loads ROM-format files (P-CODE files). If no reader/punch control option is provided, the P-code loader menu is not displayed. END : Terminate IPL processing and starts the system
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 161
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
J.2 PROCESSING FLOW FOR THE P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
J.2.1 RAM Initializing Menu
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
The P-CODE loader function performs processing as follows. At each step the appropriate menu is displayed. (a) RAM initializing menu # (b) Loading start menu # (c) Loading menu # (d) Loading end menu # (e) Menu for transferring data into flash ROM memory # (f) Menu for end of transfer of flash ROM memory
When the P-CODE loader function is executed, the function starts initializing the RAM area. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(MAPPING - 1MB) –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE
[
][
][
][
][
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 162
]
J.2.2 Loading Start Menu
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Upon completion of RAM area initialization, the loading start menu is displayed. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(MAPPING - 1MB) –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
LOADING READY ? : YES/NO
[
][
][
YES
][
NO
][
]
[ YES ] :
Starts loading data into DRAM.
[ NO
Cancels loading data (IPL menu reappears).
] :
Once preparations for data transfer have been completed on the personal computer, press the [YES] soft key. The CNC enters the data reception wait state. To start data transfer, execute the data transfer command (see Section 4.3) from the personal computer.
J.2.3 Loading Menu
When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as shown below. Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together with its address, are displayed. An asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 8k bytes. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE
[
][
][
][
][
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 163
]
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
J.2.4 Loading End Menu
When loading ends, either of the following screens appears to indicate whether loading terminated normally. (For normal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxx BYTES LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? : YES/NO [
][
][
YES
][
NO
][
]
[ YES ] :
Starts writing data into flash ROM memory.
[ NO
Cancels writing data into flash ROM memory (IPL menu reappears).
] :
Specify whether writing data into flash ROM memory is started by selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key. (For abnormal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB) ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
(ERROR OCCURED) ILLEGAL CHARACTER LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO [
][
[ YES ] :
][
YES
][
NO
][
]
Starts reloading data into DRAM.
NOTE Reloading data is started after DRAM is initialized.
[ NO
] :
Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 164
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
NOTE The IPL menu reappears after DRAM is initialized. Specify whether reloading data into DRAM is started by selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 165
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
J.2.5 Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
The following menu is displayed while data is being transferred from DRAM into flash ROM memory. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING [
][
][
][
][
]
While data is being loaded into flash ROM memory, ”EXECUTING” blinks.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 166
J.2.6 Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
When transferring data into flash ROM memory is completed, either of the following screens appears to indicate whether the transfer terminated normally.
(For normal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE [
[ END ] :
][
][
][
][
END
]
Terminates the P-code loader function (IPL menu reappears).
(Abnormal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE
(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)
= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––
(ERROR OCCURED) ILLEGAL CHARACTER LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO [
][
][
YES
][
NO
][
]
[ YES ] : Starts reloading data into flash ROM memory. [ NO ] : Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears). Specify whether reloading data into flash ROM memory is started by selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 167
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
J.2.7 Notes
(1) The Series 20 uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and output during loading. The Series 20 cannot use another channel for loading. (2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not supported. The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether ASCII or ISO data is being used. (3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters cannot be specified using the loading screen. (4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the P-CODE section is transferred. (5) For the first loading after the RAM module is mounted, set the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so that the data including the executor section is loaded.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 168
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
J.3 PARAMETER
Address 0020
I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I/O CHANNEL
Setting Entry Data type : Byte Data range : 0 to 3 Select an I/ O device used. 0 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 1 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 2 : Select a device connected to channel 2. (I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD) I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
0101
#3
#2
#1
ASI
Data type SB2
#0 SB2
: Bit : Number of stop bits: 0 : 1 bit 1 : 2 bits : Input data code: 0 : ISO 1 : ASCII
ASI
NOTE EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER. Address 0102
Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)
Data type : Byte Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according to Table 1. Table 1 Set value
Specification of I/O device
0
RS–232–C
1
FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2
FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4
Unused
5
Portable tape reader
6
FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 169
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 0103
Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)
Data type : Byte Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2. Table 2 Set
Baud rate
Set
1
50
5
2
100
3
110
4
150
Baud rate
Set
Baud rate
20
9
2400
6
300
10
4800
7
600
11
9600
8
1200
12
19200
Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for P–CODE LOADER. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
0111
#3
#2
#1
ASI
#0 SB2
Data type : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit is the same as parameter no. 101. Address 0112
Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)
Data type : Byte Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 1. Address 0113
Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=1 )
Data type : Byte Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
0121
#4
#3
#2
ASI
#1
#0 SB2
Data type : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each bit is the same as parameter no. 101. Address 0122
Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)
Data type : Byte Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 1. Address 0123
Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=2 )
Data type : Byte Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 170
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
8701
#1
#0
PLD
Data type : Bit PLD : P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer 0 : Clears RAM of macro compiler and rewrites all contents. 1 : Do not clear RAM of macro compiler and overwrites it.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 171
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
J.4 ALARMS
Message
Meaning
EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING
Macro executer option is not equipped.
I/O OPTION NOTHING
Reader/puncher control 1 option is not selected.
I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING
Reader/puncher control 2 option is not selected.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL
A channel other than channel 1 and 2 is selected.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER
Transferred data is not correct.
OVERRUN
Overrun error.
FRAMING ERROR
Framing error.
DSR SIGNAL OFF
Communication error.
PARITY ERROR
Data with no parity was transferred.
CHECK SUM ERROR
Check sum error.
UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED
F-ROM module is unknown or not mounted.
ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION
F-ROM file ID is incorrect.
NO SPACE
There is no space in F- ROM module.
ERASE ERROR
Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.
PROGRAM ERROR
Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 172
B–66102E/10
K
APPENDIX
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 173
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K.1 OUTLINE
The boot system of the Series 15-B/15i-A first loads the CNC system software (Flash Memory (F-ROM) → DRAM), then starts execution of the CNC software so that other software can be executed. The Series 15-B/15i-A boot system supports the following system maintenance functions: (1) Registering a file in F-ROM D Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card conforming to JEIDA V4.1. (2) Checking a file (series and edition) in F-ROM (3) Deleting a file from F-ROM (4) Writing a file in F-ROM to a memory card (5) Registering a ROM-format file stored on a macro cassette (ROM cassette) into F-ROM (only series 15-B) This appendix describes how to register/delete macro programs into/from the Series 15-B/15i-A by using the above functions. CAUTION 1 Memory card handling A memory card can be inserted or removed while the power is on. While the boot system is running, however, insert or remove a memory card only while the main menu is displayed. 2 ROM cassette handling (Only Series 15-B) Turn off the power before attempting to insert or remove a ROM cassette. * For the Series 15–B and 15i–A, the display numbers and order may differ. The operation method is, however, the same. In the text of this manual, the screens of the Series 15–B are used. For details of the Series 15i–A, refer to the Maintenance Manual (B–63325EN).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 174
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
K.2 MEMORY CARD SPECIFICATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
(a) Specifications For the Series 15-B/15i-A boot system, commercially available memory cards conforming to the following specification can be used: Format : JEIDA Ver. 4 or above Capacity : 512K bytes or more (for macro compilers) (b) Size of MEM-format file The following table lists the maximum size of a MEM-format file which can be saved to a memory card: MEM-format file
Size in memory card
256K bytes
262272 bytes (256K bytes + 128 bytes)
512K bytes
524416 bytes (512K bytes + 128 bytes)
NOTE A MEM-format file cannot be split and saved to two or more memory card. Always prepare a memory card having a capacity greater than the size of the MEM-format file to be saved. Two or more MEM-format files can be saved to a single memory card. (c) Restrictions imposed on the boot system The boot system can access only those files in the root directory. Files in a subdirectory cannot be accessed. In principle, for the boot system, do not use a memory card containing a subdirectory.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 175
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K.3 STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM
The starting procedure depends on whether a MEM-format file is loaded from a memory card into F-ROM or whether a ROM-format file is loaded from a ROM cassette. Starting procedure Main menu item
”Page Up” key, ”Page Down” key
”⇐”, ”⇒” (Only Series 15–B)
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
Loads a file from a memory card into FROM.
Loads a file from a ROM cassette into F-ROM.
SYSTEM DATA CHECK
Lists the files, registered in F-ROM, and checks the file.
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
Saves a file, registered in F-ROM, to a memory card.
”Page Up” key, ”Page Down” key: Turn the power on while holding down the Page Up and Page Down keys. ”⇐”, ”⇒”: Turn the power on while holding down the ⇐ and ⇒ cursor keys. (Only Series 15–B) In both cases, the following boot system title screen appears.
RAM TEST : ROM TEST : DRAM ID : SRAM ID : FROM (CNC) : FROM (PMC) : CNC DATA SEARCH
END END 6014 H 0000 0000 0023 PASS : sEND
Fig. K.3 (a) Boot System Title Screen
The contents vary with the system being used.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 176
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
After power-on, releasing the pressed keys causes the following boot system main menu to be displayed: SYSTEM MONITOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA SAVE FILE DATA BACKUP END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MODE AND HIT INPUT KEY
Fig. K.3 (b) Boot System Main Menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 177
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K.4 REGISTERING A MEM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A MEMORY CARD, INTO F–ROM
(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit. PMC
PSU
Series 15-B Memory card
Fig. K.4 (a) Mounting of a Memory Card
NOTE The PMC slot is used as the memory card interface (Main slot in case of series15i–A). The memory card can be inserted or removed while the power is turned on. When the boot system is active, make sure that the main menu [see Fig. K.3 (b)] is displayed on the screen before inserting or removing the memory card. Otherwise, proper access is not made, and the contents of the memory card files may be destroyed. (2) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the page-up and page-down keys. Then the boot system is activated. Refer to ”K.3. STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM”.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 178
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
(3) Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” using the cursor keys and press the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the following information is displayed on the screen: SYSTEM DATA CHECK FILE DIRECTORY 1. OPTIONA3 ( 2) 2. HELP MSG ( 2) 3. DG SERVO ( 1) 4. NC BASIC (10) 5. PCD 256A ( 2) 6. PMC-NA0B ( 1) 7. MCR-CMPA ( 2) END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY
Fig. K.4 (b) DATA CHECK DIRECTORY Screen
Check this screen to see if any MEM format file are (hereinafter called a P–CODE file) registered. If a MEM format file is already registered, its file name is displayed (see the table below). Table K.4 R CODE file names
D Series 15–B File name
Description
PCD 256A
For systems without a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512A
For systems without a sub-CPU (512K bytes)
PCD 256M
For systems with a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512M
For systems with a sub-CPU (512K bytes)
D Series 15i–A File name
Description
PD1M 256K
256 KB for M system
PD1M 0.5M
512 KB for M system
PD1M 1.0M
1024 KB for M system
(4) If a P-CODE file is already registered, delete it. To delete a P-CODE file, select it with the cursor, then press the ”delete” key. When no P-CODE file is registered, proceed to step 7. (5) The message ”DELETE OK?” appears. Make sure that the selected file is a P-CODE file, then press the input key. If the wrong file has been selected, press the cancel key. The DATA CHECK DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] is then displayed again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 179
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
CAUTION When an attempt is made to delete a system file, such as a CNC program or the macro compiler, the message ”PROTECT FILE” appears on the screen and the attempt is rejected. However, the system deletes user files, such as the PMC ladder, without asking for confirmation. Once deletion has started, the process cannot be halted. If no backup file exists on a memory card or another storage medium, the contents of the file cannot be restored in any way. To avoid such inadvertent deletion of files, make sure that the correct file has been selected before deleting it. Also, back up user files at appropriate intervals.
(6) When the file has been successfully deleted, the message ”DELETE COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA CHECK DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] 1 is then displayed again. Confirm that the P-CODE file is no longer listed. (7) Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again. (8) Select ”1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING” using the cursor keys, then press the input key. The directories in the memory card are listed on the screen. SYSTEM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY 1. 2. 3. 4. END
Title
LADDER1. ROM LADDER2. ROM TEST. DAT MACRO. ROM
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY
Fig. K.4 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen
CAUTION If a ROM cassette error occurs, check the title. When the boot system has been activated by holding down the page-up and page-down keys, the title should read: SYSTEM DATA LOADING. If this title is not displayed, turn off the system power once, then turn it on again.
(9) Select the P-CODE file using the cursor keys, then press the input key.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 180
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
(10)The message ”OK? INPUT/CANCEL” appears. To register the selected program, press the input key. To not register the selected file cancel, press the ”cancel” key. The DATA LOADING DIRECTORY screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then displayed again. CAUTION The boot system registers any file having the acceptable format. Once registration has started, it cannot be halted. If no backup file exists on a memory card or another storage medium, the previously saved data of the file cannot be restored in any way. To avoid such inadvertent registration of files, make sure that the correct file has been selected before registering it. Also, back up files at appropriate intervals. (11)When the file has been successfully registered, the message ”PROGRAM COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA LOADING DIRECTORY screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then displayed again. (12)Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again. (13)Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” to retrieve the contents of F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered, press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]. (14)Select ”END” on the main menu and press the input key. The blinking message ”LOADING CNC DATA” appears. The CNC starts up about ten seconds later. (15)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally. (16)Remove the memory card from the memory card interface. The card can be removed even when the CNC power is on.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 181
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K.5 SAVING A MEM–FORMAT FILE FROM F–ROM TO A MEMORY CARD
(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit to activate the boot system. See steps 1 and 2 of Sec.K.4, Procedure for registering a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM. (2) Select ”3. SYSTEM DATA SAVE” using the cursor keys, then press the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the following information is displayed on the screen: SYSTEM DATA SAVE FILE DIRECTORY 1. OPTIONA1 ( 2) 2. HELP MSG ( 2) 3. DGTL SRV ( 1) 4. NC BASIC (10) 5. PCD 256A ( 2) 6. PMC-NA0B ( 1) 7. MCR-CMPA ( 2) END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY
Fig. K.5 DATA SAVE DIRECTORY Screen
(3) Select one of the P-CODE files listed below using the cursor, then press the input key. D Series 15–B File name
Description
PCD 256A
For systems without a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512A
For systems without a sub-CPU (512K bytes)
PCD 256M
For systems with a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512M
For systems with a sub-CPU (512K bytes)
D Series 15i–A File name
Description
PD1M 256K
256 KB for M system
PD1M 0.5M
512 KB for M system
PD1M 1.0M
1024 KB for M system
NOTE System files, such as the CNC program or the micro compiler, cannot be saved (if you attempt to save one of these files, the message ”PROTECT FILE” is displayed).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 182
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
(4) The message ”INPUT FILE NAME” appears. Input the file name using the MDI key. A file must be named according to MS-DOS file naming rules; that is, a file name consisting of up to eight characters followed by a three-character or shorter extension. During file name input: D The cursor can be moved using the cursor (² and ³) keys. D The cancel key functions as the backspace key. D Pressing the reset key displays the DATA SAVE DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.5] again. D Characters are input in the overwrite mode. (5) After inputting the file name, press the input key to save the file. (6) If the save operation terminates normally, the message ”SAVE COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA SAVE DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.5] is then displayed again. (7) Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 183
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K.6 REGISTERING A ROM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A ROM CASSETTE, INTO F–ROM
(1) Connect the ROM cassette into which the program has been written using System P or a personal computer to the ROM cassette adapter (A20B-2000-0760).
ROM cassette adapter (A20B-2000-0760)
ROM cassette
Fig. K.6 (a) Connection of the ROM Cassette to the ROM Cassette Adapter
(2) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, then insert the ROM cassette adapter into the mini slot of the CNC unit. The mini slot is on the PSU and is protected with a cover when not in use. PMC
PSU
Series 15-B
ROM cassette
ROM cassette adapter
Fig. K.6 (b) Connection of the ROM Cassette Adapter to the CNC Unit
CAUTION Be sure to turn off the power of the CNC unit before inserting or removing the ROM cassette. Inserting or removing the adapter while the CNC power is on can not only damage the CNC unit and the ROM cassette but can also destroy battery-retained data, such as NC programs and parameters.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 184
B–66102E/10
APPENDIX
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
(3) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the cursor (← and →) keys, and the boot system is activated. Refer to ”K.3 STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM”. (4) Check the contents of F-ROM. If a P-CODE file is already registered, delete it. For the deletion procedure, see 2 Procedure for registering a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM, steps (3) to (7) in Sec.K.4. (5) Select ”SYSTEM DATA LOADING” using the cursor keys, then press the input key. The following contents of the ROM cassette are read and displayed on the screen: Title
SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE) P-CODE 256K (WITHOUT SUB-CPU)
ROM type Format file
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY
Fig. K.6 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen (for ROM Cassette)
The type of mounted ROM cassette (ROM format file) is displayed (see the table below). If the displayed ROM cassette type does not agree with that of the connected ROM cassette, check the ROM cassette. ROM cassette/ROM format file
Description
1M-bit ROM without a sub-CPU
P-CODE 256K (without sub-CPU)
2M-bit ROM without a sub- CPU
P-CODE 512K (without sub-CPU)
1M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU
P-CODE 256K (with sub-CPU)
2M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU
P-CODE 512K (with sub-CPU)
CAUTION If an alarm related to the memory card occurs or when displaying memory card directories, confirm the title. When the CNC unit has been activated with the cursor (² and ³) keys pressed down, the title should read: SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE) If this title is not displayed, activate the CNC unit again. (6) The message ”OK? INPUT/CANCEL” appears. To register the P-CODE file, press the input key. To not resister the P-CODE file, press the ”cancel” key. Then the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again. (7) When the file has been successfully registered, the message ”PROGRAM COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 185
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
(8) Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” to retrieve the contents of F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered in F-ROM. Press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]. (9) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, and remove the ROM cassette adapter from the mini slot. After removing the adapter, place the cover over the slot to protect it. CAUTION Avoid using the CNC unit while the ROM cassette remains in its mini slot. If the CNC unit is used without removing the ROM cassette, the data stored in the ROM cassette takes precedence, disabling the use of the micro compiler and P-CODE file program resident in F-ROM. (10)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 186
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)
K.7 TYPES OF FILES IN F–ROM
The following table lists the macro compiler/executer file names displayed on the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen: D Series 15–B Displayed name MCR-CMPA
Type
Description
S
Macro compiler for systems without a sub-CPU
MCR-CMPM
S
Macro compiler for systems with a sub-CPU
PCD 256A
U
Macro program (256K bytes) for systems without a sub-CPU
PCD 512A
U
Macro program (512K bytes) for systems without a sub-CPU
PCD 256M
U
Macro program (256K bytes) for systems with a sub-CPU
PCD 512M
U
Macro program (512K bytes) for systems with a sub-CPU
D Series 15i–A Displayed name
Type
Description
PD1M 256K
U
256 KB for M system
PD1M 0.5M
U
512 KB for M system
PD1M 1.0M
U
1024 KB for M system
Type Symbols: S : System file supplied by FANUC. The following operations cannot be performed on system files: D Saving to a memory card D Deletion from F-ROM NOTE The system files are necessary when a custom macro program is directly compiled by the Series 15-B. U:
Data file created by the user. All supported file access operations can be performed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 187
L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY
L
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY
Library file names of macro library are listed below: Table L.1 List of Macro Library File Names System name
Specification
Library file name
Remarks
MACRO LIBRARY (0)
A08B–9001–J600#ZZ03
FOMC_xx.MEX FOTC_xx.MEX FOTTC_xx.MEX
Series 0–MC Series 0–TC Series 0–TC (Sub side)
FANUC Series 0i MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J764#ZZ03
F0IMA_xx.MEX F0ITA_xx.MEX
Series 0i–MA Series 0i–TA
MACRO LIBRARY (16)
A08B–9001–J610#ZZ03
F16MA_xx.MEX F16TA_xx.MEX F16TTS xx.MEX F16LR_xx.MEX F16MB_xx.MEX F16MMB xx.MEX F16TB_xx.MEX F16TTB xx.MEX F16LTB xx.MEX F16LMB xx.MEX F16MC_xx.MEX F16MMC xx.MEX F16TC_xx.MEX F16TTC xx.MEX F16LTC xx.MEX F16LMC xx.MEX
Series 16–MA Series 16–TA Series 16–TTA (Sub side) For loader control (Model A) Series 16–MB Series 16–MB (Sub side) Series 16–TB Series 16–TB (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model B) For M Series loader control (Model B) Series 16–MC Series 16–MC (Sub side) Series 16–TC Series 16–TC (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model C) For M Series loader control (Model C)
FANUC Series 16i–A MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J760#ZZ07
F16MI_xx.MEX F16TI_xx.MEX F16TMM_xx.MEX F16TMT_xx.MEX
Series 16i–MA Series 16i–TA Series 16i–TMM (Sub side/M series) Series 16i–TMT (Main side/T series)
FANUC Series 16i–B MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J830#ZZ07
16IMB_xx.MEX 16ITB_xx.MEX 16TMMB_xx.MEX 16TMTB_xx.MEX
Series 16i–MB Series 16i–TB Series 16i–TMB (Sub side/M series) Series 16i–TMB (Main side/T series)
MACRO LIBRARY (18)
A08B–9001–J625#ZZ03
F18MA_xx.MEX F18TA_xx.MEX F18TTSxx.MEX F18LR_xx.MEX F18MB_xx.MEX F18TB_xx.MEX F18TTBxx.MEX F18LTBxx.MEX F18LMBxx.MEX F18MC_xx.MEX F18TC_xx.MEX F18TTCxx.MEX F18LTCxx.MEX F18LMCxx.MEX
Series 18–MA Series 18–TA Series 18–TTA (Sub side) For loader control (Model A) Series 18–MB Series 18–TB Series 18–TB (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model B) For M Series loader control (Model B) Series 18–MC Series 18–TC Series 18–TC (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model C) For M Series loader control (Model C)
FANUC Series 18i–A MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J765#ZZ07
F18MI_xx.MEX F18TI_xx.MEX F18TMM_xx.MEX F18TMT_xx.MEX
Series 18i–MA Series 18i–TA Series 18i–TMM (Sub side/M series) Series 18i–TMT (Main side/T series)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 188
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
System name
Specification
L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY
Library file name
Remarks
FANUC Series 18i–B MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J831#ZZ07
F18IMB_xx.MEX F18ITB_xx.MEX 18TMMB_xx.MEX 18TMTB_xx.MEX
Series 18i–MB Series 18i–MB Series 18i–TMB (Sub side/M series) Series 18i–TMB (Main side/T series)
MACRO LIBRARY (16 P/L/W)
A08B–9001–J613#ZZ03
F16LA_xx.MEX F16PA_xx.MEX F16WA_xx.MEX F16LB_xx.MEX F16PB_xx.MEX
Series 16–LA Series 16–PA Series 16–WA Series 16–LB Series 16–PB
MACRO LIBRARY (15A)
A08B–9001–J620#ZZ03
F15_A_xx.MEX F15_B_xx.MEX
Series 15–A W/0 sub Series 15–A with sub (Main side 256K byte) Series 15–A with sub (Sub side 256K byte) Series 15–A with sub (Main side 512K byte) Series 15–A with sub (Sub side 512K byte)
F15_C_xx.MEX F15_D_xx.MEX F15_E_xx.MEX MACRO LIBRARY (15B)
A08B–9001–J640#ZZ03
F15B_Axx.MEX F15B_Bxx.MEX F15B_Cxx.MEX F15B_Dxx.MEX F15B_Exx.MEX F15B_Fxx.MEX
Series 15–B W/O sub 256K byte Series 15–B W/O sub 512K byte Series 15–B with sub (Main side 256K byte) Series 15–B with sub (Sub side 256K byte) Series 15–B with sub (Main side 512K byte) Series 15–B with sub (Sub side 512K byte)
FANUC Series 15i MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J640#ZZ07
F15IA_xx.MEX
For Series 15i–MA
MACRO LIBRARY (21MB)
A08B–9001–J690#ZZ03
F20MA_xx.MEX
Series 21–MB (D201 series)
F21MB_xx.MEX
Series 21–MB (DDA1 series)
MACRO LIBRARY (21TA)
A08B–9001–J633#ZZ03
PMDT_xx.MEX
Series 21–TA (8860 series)
F21TA_xx.MEX
Series 21–TA (8865,8866 series)
MACRO LIBRARY (21TB)
A08B–9001–J639#ZZ03
F21TB_xx.MEX
Series 21–TB (controller A) (DE01 series)
F21TBN_xx.MEX
Series 21–TB (controller B) (DEA1 series)
MACRO LIBRARY (21TB)
A08B–9001–J639#ZZ03
F21LTB_xx.MEX
Series 21–TB (loader control)
FANUC Series 21i–A MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J769#ZZ07
F21MI_xx.MEX F21TI_xx.MEX
Series 21i–MA Series 21i–TA
FANUC Series 21i–B MACRO LIBRARIES
A08B–9001–J832#ZZ07
F21IMB_xx.MEX F21ITB_xx.MEX
Series 21i–MB Series 21i–TB
MACRO LIBRARY (20F G)
A08B–9001–J670#ZZ03
DZ70_xx.MEX
Series 20–FA (512K byte)
MACRO LIBRARY (20F GP)
A08B–9001–J671#ZZ03
DZ71_xx.EE1 DZ71_xx.EE2
With Series 20–FA Guidance Programming function (1M byte) POC PRG.SRC FACE PRG.SRC DRILL PR.SRC SIDE PRG.SRC With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 189
L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY
System name
APPENDIX
Specification
B–66102E/10
Library file name
Remarks
MACRO LIBRARY (20F GB)
A08B–9001–J672#ZZ03
DZ72_xx.MEX
Series 20–FA (1M byte)
MACRO LIBRARY (20F GPB)
A08B–9001–J673#ZZ03
DZ73_xx.EX1 DZ73_xx.EX2
With Series 20–FA Guidance Programming function (1.5M byte) POC PRG.SRC FACE PRG.SRC DRILL PR.SRC SIDE PRG.SRC With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function
MACRO LIBRARY (20T G)
A08B–9001–J675#ZZ03
DZ75_xx.MEX
Series 20–TA (512K byte)
MACRO LIBRARY (20T GP)
A08B–9001–J676#ZZ03
DZ76_xx.EX1 DZ76_xx.EX2
With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function (1M byte)
MACRO LIBRARY (20T GP)
A08B–9001–J677#ZZ03
DZ77_xx.MEX
Series 20–TA (1M byte)
MACRO LIBRARY (20T GPB)
A08B–9001–J678#ZZ03
DZ78_xx.EX1 DZ78_xx.EX2
With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function (1.5M byte)
MACRO LIBRARY (20F B)
A08B–9001–J750#ZZ03
DZ62_xx.MEX
For Series 20–FA (1 MB) The FANUC standard machining guidance cannot be used.
MACRO LIBRARY (20F GB)
A08B–9001–J751#ZZ03
DZ63_xx.EX1 DZ63_xx.EX2
For Series 20–FA (1.5 MB) The FANUC standard machining guidance cannot be used. With guidance programming function
NOTE xx in a library file name indicates the edition of the library. Executer file is defined as follows. Series 15–A CNC system/ROM cassette type
CNC=
CNC2=
without SUB CPU / 256Kbyte
F15_A_xx.MEX
nothing
without SUB CPU / 512Kbyte
F15_A_xx.MEX
nothing
with SUB CPU
/ 256Kbyte
F15_B_xx.MEX
F15_C_xx.MEX
with SUB CPU
/ 512Kbyte
F15_D_xx.MEX
F15_E_xx.MEX
CNC3=
nothing
Series 15–B CNC system/Kind of P–CODE file
CNC=
CNC2=
without SUB CPU / 256Kbyte
F15B_Axx.MEX
nothing
without SUB CPU / 512Kbyte
F15B_Bxx.MEX
nothing
with SUB CPU
/ 256Kbyte
F15B_Cxx.MEX
F15B_Dxx.MEX
with SUB CPU
/ 512Kbyte
F15B_Exx.MEX
F15B_Fxx.MEX
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 190
CNC3=
nothing
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
M
M. PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
This section describes the compiler parameters and executor parameter for the CNC system excluding Series 15. For the parameters of Series 15, refer to the manuals listed below., 1) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B–61213E–1) 2) FANUC Series 15–MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro executor) (B–62073E–2)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 191
M. PARAMETERS
M.1 SERIES 15i COMPILE PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
The compile parameters are initialized to the values set in the P–CODE file at power–up. The parameters cannot be changed from MDI or others. However, parameters 8547 and 8548, which are used for debugging, can be set from MDI. Bit No. Address
#7
8500
LD6
R05 R10
#6
#5
#4
R10
#3
#2
#1
#1
#0
R05
Size of P–CODE file R10
R05
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Size of P–CODE file 256Kbyte 512Kbyte 1Mbyte Not defined
LD6 = 1: This bit must always be set 1. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
8502
NPE
TMC
EUI
VAR
DBG
SBK
DIR
#0 DIR
= 0 : The program list screen does not show P–CODE macro program numbers. = 1 : The program list screen shows P–CODE macro program numbers.
NOTE P–CODE macro program names cannot be displayed. SBK
DBG VAR EUI
TMC
NPE
= 0 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is executed with the debug function, continuous execution is performed. = 1 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is executed with the debug function, single–block execution is performed. = 0 : The debug function is not used. = 1 : The debug function is used. = 0 : The P–CODE macro variable screen cannot be displayed. = 1 : The P–CODE macro variable screen can be displayed. = 0 : The P–CODE macro uses UI00 to UI15 and UO00 to UO15 as UI/UO signals. = 1 : The P–CODE macro uses EUI00 to EUI15 and EUO00 to EUO15 as UI/UO signals. = 0 : An execution macro call by a T code is a subprogram call of O90000. = 1 : An execution macro call by a T code is a macro call of O90008. = 0 : Under RS–232–C control, % (EOF) is automatically output. = 1 : Under RS–232–C control, % (EOF) is not automatically output.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 192
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
8503
MV7
MV6
MV5
MV4
MV3
MV2
MV1
MV0
MVA
MV9
MV8
ECK
8504
= 0 : P–CODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are also used as custom macro common variables. = 1 : P–CODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are independent of custom macro common variables. The following bits of the two parameters set the range of common variables. No.8503 MV0 : #100 to 149 MV1 : #150 to 199 MV2 : #500 to 549 MV3 : #550 to 599 MV4 : #600 to 699 MV5 : #700 to 799 MV6 : #800 to 899 MV7 : #900 to 999
No. 8504 MV8 : #200 to 299 MV9 : #300 to 399 MVA : #400 to 499
ECK
= 0 : Command input variable #8501 does not expand the command keys that can be read. = 1 : Command input variable #8501 expands the command keys that can be read. After the expansion, the following command keys can be read: Function menu key
22
Function key
POS
23
Function key
PROG
24
System
27
Function key
OFFSET SETTING
25
Function key
CUSTOM
26
Function key
Function key
MESSAGE
28
Function key
GRAPH
29
Function key
30
NOTE If the expansion is performed, pressing any of the command keys does not terminate the conversational macro function. Accordingly, the corresponding screen is not displayed. Conversational macro start control variable #8510 must be set to 0 to terminate the conversational macro function. Bit No. Address 8507
CAN
NTV
#7
#6
#5 PWS
#4
#3
#2
#1
NTV
CAN
#0
= 0 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or reception under reader/puncher interface control, no interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key. = 1 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or reception under reader/puncher interface control, an interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key. = 0 : G336 (data transmission) outputs a blank character for performing a TV check. = 1 : G336 (data transmission) does not output a blank character for performing a TV check.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 193
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
PWS
B–66102E/10
= 0 : The P–CODE work number search is disabled. = 1 : The P–CODE work number search is enabled. Bit No.
Address
#7
#6
#5
8508
PGR
CLG
B5C
AC1 AC2 TEC SSC BSC
=0: =1: =0: =1: =0: =1: =0: =1: =0: =1:
CLG PCR
=0: =1: =0: =1:
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SSC
TEC
AC2
AC1
A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is disabled. A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is enabled. A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is disabled. A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is enabled. A subprogram or macro call by a T code is disabled. A subprogram or macro call by a T code is enabled. A subprogram call by an S code is disabled. A subprogram call by an S code is enabled. A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous function code is disabled. A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous function code is enabled. Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is disabled. Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is enabled. CNC program referencing/writing, cutting distance summation/preset, and RS–232–C control are disabled. CNC program referencing/writing, cutting distancesummation/preset, and RS–232–C control are enabled. Bit No.
Address
#7
8509
GMP
EV1
EV2
MCT
PTC
GMP
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PTC
MCT
EV2
EV1
= 0 : Expansion P–CODE variables (#40000 and after) are floating–point data. = 1 : Expansion P–CODE variables (#40000 and after) are integer data. = 0 : P–CODE variables (#30000 and after) are floating–point data. = 1 : P–CODE variables (#30000 and after) are integer data. = 0 : A modal macro call by a G code is a move command call (equivalent to G66). = 1 : A modal macro call by a G code is a call in each block (equivalent to G66.1). = 0 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF. = 1 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF CR CR. = 0 : The following calls are enabled: call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address during a G–code call, and a G–code call during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 194
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
M. PARAMETERS
= 1 : The following calls are disabled: call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address during a G–code call, and a G–code call during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address. (This type of call is processed as a normal NC command.) Address 8510
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9001
8511
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9002
8512
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9003
Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99) These parameters specify M codes of subprogram calls for calling programs 9001, 9002, and 9003. Address 8513
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9010
8514
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9011
8515
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9012
8516
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9013
8517
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9014
8518
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9015
8519
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9016
8520
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9017
8521
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9018
8522
G code of subprogram call for calling program 9019
Valid data range : –999 to 999 (excluding 0, 65, 66, and 67) These parameters specify G codes of macro calls for calling programs 9010 to 9019.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 195
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 8523
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9020
8524
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9021
8525
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9022
8526
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9023
8527
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9024
8528
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9025
8529
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9026
8530
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9027
8531
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9028
8532
M code of subprogram call for calling program 9029
Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99) These parameters specify M codes of macro calls for calling programs 9020 to 9029. Address 8533
M code of subprogram call for calling a user program
Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99) This parameter specifies an M code of subprogram call for calling a user program. Address 8536
Main program number of conversational macro
Valid data range : 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the main program number of the conversational macro. NOTE 1 The program number of this parameter is set in the conversational macro execution control variable at power–up.
Address 8537
Main program number of auxiliary macro
Valid data range : 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the main program number of the auxiliary macro. NOTE 1 The program number of this parameter is set in the auxiliary macro execution control variable at power–up.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 196
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
M. PARAMETERS
Address 8538
Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (lower limit)
8539
Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (upper limit)
Valid data range : 1 to 9999 These parameters specify the range of call codes of subprogram calls by a range specification M code. NOTE 1 If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of parameter 8538 is greater than the value of parameter 8539, the subprogram call by a range specification M code is disabled. 2 M30, M98, M99, and M codes used for macro and subprogram calls are not used as call codes even if the codes are included in the specified range.
Address 8540
Transmission/receptionwait time–out period (s)
Valid data range : 0 to 180 This parameter specifies a time–out period for the transmission/reception wait state brought by the send/receive function (G335 to G338) under reader/puncher interface control. If 0 is specified, no time–out occurs. Address 8544
Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9004)
8545
Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9005)
Valid data range : 65(A) to 90(Z) (excluding O, N, P, L, G, and axis names) These parameters specify call addresses of subprogram calls by a special code.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 197
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 8546
Number of G–code macro calls (multiple) to be defined
8551
First G code for G–code macro calls (multiple)
8552
First program number of G–code macro calls (multiple)
Valid data range : Parameter 8546: 1 to 255 Parameter 8551: –9999 to 9999 (excluding 0) Parameter 8552: 1 to 9999 Parameter 8546 specifies the number of G–code macro calls (multiple) to be programmed. Parameter 8551 specifies the first one of the code numbers used for the calls. Parameter 8552 specifies the first program number of the execution macro. If a negative value is specified in parameter 8551, a modal call is executed. The MCT bit (bit 2 of parameter 8509) specifies whether the modal call is executed as a move command call (G66) or as a call in each block (G66.1). NOTE The G–code macro call (multiple) is disabled in the following cases: 1 A value beyond the valid range is specified in any of the parameters. 2 The highest G code exceeds 9999. 3 The highest program number exceeds 9999. G65, G66, G67, and G codes specified for macro calls are not used as call codes even if they are included in the range.
Address 8547
Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro program in which a break occurs
Valid data range : 0 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of the conversational or auxiliary macro program in which a break is caused by the debug function. NOTE If either this parameter or parameter 8548 is set to a non–zero value when the conversational macro is executed, a break is enabled. The program number specified in this parameter and the sequence number specified in parameter 8548 are set as break conditions.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 198
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 8548
Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which a break occurs
Valid data range : 0 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of the conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which a break is caused by the debug function. NOTE If either this parameter or parameter 8547 is set to a non–zero value when the conversational macro is executed, a break is enabled. The sequence number specified in this parameter and the program number specified in parameter 8547 are set as break conditions.
Address 8549
Number of P–CODE variables (#30000 and after)
Valid data range : 0 to 100 This parameter specifies the number of P–CODE variables. The setting of the EV2 bit (bit 1 of parameter 8509) affects the number of variables that are actually defined, as follows: When EV2 is set to 0 (floating point data): (Value of parameter 8549) 40 Wen EV2 is set to 1 (integer data): (Value of parameter 8549) 100 Address 8550
Number of expansion P–CODE variables (#4000 and after)
Valid data range : 0 to 1970 This parameter specifies the number of expansion P–CODE variables. The setting of the EV1 bit (bit 0 of parameter 8509) affects the number of variables that are actually defined, as follows: When EV1 is set to 0 (floating–point data): (Value of parameter 8550) 10 Wen EV1 is set to 1 (integer data): (Value of parameter 8550) 30 Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
8555
X08
X07
X06
X05
X04
X03
X02
X01
8556
X16
X15
X14
X13
X12
X10
X09
X08
8557
X24
X23
X22
X21
X20
X19
X18
X17
= 0 : A macro call by an axis address is disabled. = 1 : A macro call by an axis address is enabled.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 199
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
The bits of the parameters select different axes. No.8555 X01 : First axis X02 : Second axis : No. 8504 : X24 : Twenty–fourth axis Bit No. Address
#7
8558
ACS
XDL PWT
15I
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ACA
P98
15I
PWT
XDL
ACS
= 0 : A macro call by an axis address always calls O9009. = 1 : A macro call by an axis address calls a program depending on the axis. First axis ! Calls O9031. Second axis ! Calls O9032. : n–th axis ! Calls a program having an O number of 9030 + n. = 0 : Interlock along an axis is disabled. = 1 : Interlock along an axis is enabled. = 0 : The conversational macro function is not executed at power–up. = 1 : The conversational macro function is executed at power–up. The position display screen is normally displayed at power–up, but the conversational macro function can be executed to display a special screen. = 0 : The macro executor function follows Series 15–B compatible specifications. = 1 : The macro executor function follows original specifications for the Series 15i. This bit selects the following specifications: Function
Series 15–B specifications (15I = 0)
Series 15i specifications (15I = 1)
Character coordinate system System display part Soft key frame Key input line Command key input variable by parameter 8501
X0 to 73, Y0 to 26
X0 to 79, Y0 to 26
FS15–B
FS15i
Y22 The INSERT, ALTER, and DELETE keys cannot be read.
Method of executing both auxiliary macro and conversational macro
Sequential execution (After the program end command of the auxiliary macro is executed, the conversational macro is executed.) When a foreground PS alarm or MC alarm is issued
Y23 The keys can be read. INSERT : 31 ALTER : 32 DELETE : 33 Parallel execution
Alarm information of window function (foreground PS alarm of alarm basic flags)
When a foreground PS alarm is issued. An MC alarm can be read with basic flag 2.)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 200
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
P98
ACA
M. PARAMETERS
= 0 : The execution macro for P–CODE work number search is called by a macro call. A local variable used by the execution macro cannot be used in the main program. = 1 : The execution macro for P–CODE work number search is called by a subprogram call. A local variable used by the execution macro is taken over to the main program. = 0 : A macro call by a T code or axis address always passes an argument without decimal point as an integer value. = 1 : A macro call by a T code or axis address passes an argument without decimal point, adding a decimal point according to the setting of the DPI bit (bit 0 of parameter 2400).
Address 8570
Graphic coordinate system shift amount (X–axis)
8571
Graphic coordinate system shift amount (Y–axis)
Valid data range : –320 to 319 (X–axis), –216 to 231 (Y–axis) These parameters specify the shift amounts of the graphic coordinate system in dots. Address 8572
Address of the interlock mode signal of an axis
8573
Bit position of the interlock mode signal of an axis
Valid data range : 0 to 7 These parameters specify a PMC internal relay (R area) signal that determines the control mode of the interlock function of an axis. Address : R area number Bit position : Bit position of the signal NOTE The interlock function of an axis is disabled when: 1 The address refers to a position beyond the R area. 2 The bit position is incorrect.
Address 8574
P–CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (top)
8575
P–CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (bottom)
Valid data range : 500 to 999 These parameters specify the range of battery–backed P–CODE common variables (#500 to #999) to be write–protected. NOTE If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of parameter 8574 is larger than the value of parameter 8575, no write protection is provided.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 201
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 8576
P–CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (top)
8577
P–CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (bottom)
Valid data range : 200 to 499 These parameters specify the range of battery–backed P–CODE common variables (#200 to #499) to be write–protected. NOTE If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of parameter 8576 is larger than the value of parameter 8577, no write protection is provided.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 202
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
M.2 PARAMETERS OTHER THAN SERIES 15i M.2.1 Compile Parameters NOTE Usually, undefined parameters need to be set to 0. Bit No. Address Compile parameter
#7
9000
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
M3MB
M2MB
M1MB
M512
M256
M128
#6
#5
#2
#1
#0
Bit No. Address Compile parameter
#7
#4
#3
9001
#0
M4MB
M4MB
M3MB
M2MB
M1MB
M512
M256
M128
4.0MB
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.0MB
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
2.0MB
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1.0MB
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
512KB
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
256KB
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
128KB
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
NOTE 1 For the 21-TB (controller A), always specify 128 KB. 2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be specified. 3 For the 21-MB or, 21-TB (controller B), no more than 1.0 MB can be specified. 4 For the 0i–A, no more than 512 KB can be specified. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
9002
EXT1
PWSR
DAUX
XDIL
EVF
ACL2
ACL1
TCAL
TCAL ACL1 ACL2 EVF
=0: =1: =0: =1: =0: =1: =0:
Makes invalid the sub-program call with T code Makes effective the sub-program call with T code Makes invalid call by the specific code Makes effective call by the specific code (O9004/#146) Makes invalid call by the specific code Makes effective call by the specific code (O9005/#147) Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the floating decimal point format
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 203
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
= 1 : Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the fixed decimal format XDIL = 0 : Axis interlock function invalid = 1 : Axis interlock function valid DAUX = 0 : Does not make the CUSTOM screen appear at power on = 1 : Makes CUSTOM screen appear at power on PWSR = 0 : P CODE work number search function invalid = 1 : P CODE work number search valid EXT1 = 0: Extension functions invalid = 1: Extension functions valid (RS-232-C control, NC program access) CAUTION When EXT1=1, part program memory reduces by 1.63m D Series 16/18–A (part program storage of up to 80m) D Series 20 (part program storage of up to 80m) D Series 21–MB (D201 series, part program storage of up to 80m) D Series 21–TB (control unit A) Bit No. Address
#7
9003
#6
#5
PTCR
KY20
#4
#3
#2
#1
HRGR
#0 ONMSK
ONMSK= 0 : The O and N numbers are displayed on the CUSTOM screen. = 1 : The O and N numbers are not displayed on the CUSTOM screen. HRGR = 0 : Standard mode graphic display = 1 : High resolution graphic mode display (set to H1I usually) KY20 = 0 : Not +a to #8501 with decimal point input by key input variables = 1 : +a to #8501 with decimal input by key input variables (+a: +20 for a display with 7 soft keys, +40 for a display with 12 soft keys)
PTCR
= 0 : Does not output ”CR” code twice in P-CODE variable outputting = 1 : Output ”CR” code twice in P-CODE variable outputting Bit No.
Address 9004
#7
#6
CUTLG NOP_B
#5
#4 HRGC
#3
#2 IMG
SP_G_B, SP_G_C 00 : Standard G code system 01 : G code system B 10 : G code system C 11 : G code system C
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 204
#1
#0
SP_G_C SP_G_B
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
IMG
= 0 : 16-T type (Special G code) = 1 : 16-G type (Special G code)
HRGC = 0 : 9I high resolusion monochrome CRT, standard = 1 : 9I high resolution monochrome CRT, brightness modulation mode setting (paint) NOP_B = 0 : When no other address is specified in a block that calls a subprogram by a T or M code, the block is executed. = 1 : The block is not executed. CUTLG = 0 : Does not count cutting distance = 1 : Count cutting distance Bit No. Address
#7
9005
TMACC
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
AXCLS
AX4CL
AX3CL
AX2CL
AX1CL
AX1CL = 0 : =1: AX2CL = 0 : =1: AX3CL = 0 : =1: AX4CL = 0 : =1: AXCLS = 0 :
Macro program call by the 1st address is invalid Macro program call by the 1st address is valid Macro program call by the 2nd address is invalid Macro program call by the 2nd address is valid Macro program call by the 3rd address is invalid Macro program call by the 3rd address is valid Macro program call by the 4th address is invalid Macro program call by the 4th address is valid Always program O9009 is called irrespective of specified axes. = 1 : The program number to be called depends on a specified axis: Program O9031 is called when 1st axis is specified. Program O9032 is called when 2nd axis is specified. : : Program O9038 is called when 8th axis is specified. TMACC= 0 : Macro call by T code is invalid = 1 : Macro call by T code is valid Bit No. Address 9006
DIOC
#7
#6 NNUM
#5
#4
#3
US19W CNCHG DAUXR
#2
#1
#0
STDM
KEYC
DIOC
= 0 : Standard UI:G54/G55 and UO:F54/F55 are used for UI/UO(#1000-#1132) of execution macro/ conversational macro. = 1 : UI:G82/G83 and UO:F84/F85 are used for UI/UO (#1000-#1132) of execution macro/ conversational macro.
KEYC = 0 : When KEY switch =0, completion code #8529=254 in an access to NC program = 1 : KEY switch is not cheched in an access to NC program STDM = 0 : The mode and status display is changed on the USER-1, USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the conversational macro screen is displayed. = 1 : The mode and status display is left unchanged on the USER-1, USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the conversational macro screen is displayed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 205
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
DAUXR
:
Address
#7
B–66102E/10
The conversational macro screen is displayed when power is turned on while the system is in the emergency stop state or external reset state. (Parameter DAUX (No. 9002, #5) must also be set to 1.) CNCHG : Execution of the conversational macro is continued when the CUSTM key is pressed while the conversational macro screen is displayed. US19W : The screen for the 9” CRT type is displayed on the 14” CRT type. (USER-1 screen) NNUM = 0: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen, the NUM prompt is displayed. = 1: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen, the NUM prompt is not displayed. Bit No. #6
#5
#4
9007
TIDSP
#3
#2
US19WK TIVR2
:
#1
#0
TIVR1
TIDSP
The common conversational macro screen for the 2–path control is specified.
NOTE This setting is validated only for the PATH-2 cassette. Both TTDSP and CNCHG (No. 9006, #4) cannot be set to 1 at the same time.) TIVR1
:
Common conversational macro variables (#10000 to #19999) are specified. (1: For variables #10000 to #19999, areas #10000 to #19999 of the other path are used.) TIVR2 : Common conversational macro variables (#20000 to #29999) are specified. (1: For variables #20000 to #29999, areas #20000 to #29999 of the other path are used.) US19WK= 0 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position of the key–in line is not changed on a window having seven soft keys. = 1 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position of the key–in line is changed on a window having seven soft keys. Address
#7
9008
HRGCC
Bit No. #6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
HCAR
MDLP
AX8CL
AX7CL
AX6CL
AX5CL
AX5CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made valid. AX6CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made valid. AX7CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made valid. AX8CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made valid.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 206
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
MDLP = 0 : A G code to cancel modal calling cannot be used to call a macro to be executed. = 1 : A G code to cancel modal calling can be used to call O9006. MCARG= 0 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is not argument. = 1 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is argument. HRGCC = 0 : Does not set the character display screen to brightness modulation mode. = 1 : Sets the character display screen to brightness modulation mode. #7 9009
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RSRST
RSRST = 0 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro does not suspends reader/punch control. = 1 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro suspends reader/punch control. (Completion code #8539 = 12) Address 9010
M code that calls sub-program O9001
9011
M code that calls sub-program O9002
9012
M code that calls sub-program O9003
9013
G code that calls custom macro O9010
9022
G code that calls custom macro O9019
9023
M code that calls sub-program O9020
9032
M code that calls sub-program O9029
9033
M code that calls user program
9034
G code that to cancel the modal call
9035
M code calls sub-program O9001
9036
M code calls sub-program O9002
Parameters 9035 and 9036 specify the bit signal of the internal PMC relay (R area) that determines the control mode of the interlock function for a single axis direction. Signal number (0 to 999): Specifies the number of the internal PMC relay (R area). Signal position (0 to 7): Specifies the bit position of the signal. Example) When parameters 9035 and 9036 are set to 900 and 7 respectively The interlock function for a single axial direction is validated when the internal PMC relay (R900, #7) is set to 1 in the JOG or HNDL mode.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 207
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Address 9037
Used number of (1/100) of conversational macro exclusive variable
9038
Conversational macro execlusion program at the time of power supply input (CUSTOM screen 1)
9039
Auxility macro execution program number
9040
Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on
(CUSTOM screen 2)
9041
Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on
(CUSTOM screen 3)
9042
M code call by area specification, lower limit M code
9043
M code call by area specification, upper limit M code
9044
Used number of extension conversational macro variables
9045
Starting G code in G code calls of ,range specification
9046
Number of G codes in G code calls of ,range specification
9047
Starting O number in G code calls of ,range specification
9048
Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen (in the X direction)
9049
Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen (in the Y direction)
These parameters specify the distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen in units of dots. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
9100
MSFT
C9WN
DLMT
VKLM
#3
#2
#1
#0
VGCL
VGAR
VGAR = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background color. = 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background color. VGCL = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background in a background color. = 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background in a background color. (Usually, set 0.) VKLN = 0 : Key–in line background display is performed. = 1 : Key–in line background display is not performed. DLMT = 0 : The range of display with a color background is limited to a data area. = 1 : The range of display with a color background is not limited to a data area. (Usually, set 0.) C9WN = 0 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate correction is performed for character display. = 1 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate correction is not performed for character display. (Valid only when a background color is provided.)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 208
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
MSFT
M. PARAMETERS
= 0 : A soft key frame is not displayed on the CUSTOM screen. = 1 : A soft key frame is displayed on the CUSTOM screen. (Valid only when no background color is provided.)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 209
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
M.2.2 Executer Parameter
Bit No. Address
#7
9000
L2R
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MKG
RSC
EXS
STP
NDP
SQN
SQN = 1 : Displays program number of recorded program and sequence number during execution of a recorded program. = 0 : Displays program number and sequence number of called user program during execution of a recorded program. NDP = 1 : Displays variables for P-CODE program. = 0 : Does not display variables for P-CODE program. STP = 1 : Stops execution of conversational macro program. (”1” is set by break function automatically) = 0 : Execute the conversational macro program. EXS = 1 : Execute macro statement till the next NC statement has come with feed hold, during macro statement execution at execution level. = 0 : Stop if feed hold acts, during macro statement execution at execution level. RSC = 1 : Common variables #100-#149 are cleared to if NC is reset. = 0 : Common variables #100-#149 do not clear to if NC is reset. MKG : Be sure to set to 0. L2R = 1 : Does not display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen during execution macro operation. = 0 : Display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen during execution macro operation. Address 9002
Conversational macro break program number
9003
Conversational macro break sequence number
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 210
M. PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
9010
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA1 = 1 : =0: MA2 = 1 : =0: MA3 = 1 : =0: MA4 = 1 : =0: MA5 = 1 : =0: MA6 = 1 : =0: MA7 = 1 : =0: MA8 = 1 : =0:
Masks a first axis address macro call. Does not mask a first axis address macro call. Masks a second axis address macro call. Does not mask a second axis address macro call. Masks a third axis address macro call. Does not mask a third axis address macro call. Masks a fourth axis address macro call. Does not mask a fourth axis address macro call. Masks a fifth axis address macro call. Does not mask a fifth axis address macro call. Masks a sixth axis address macro call. Does not mask a sixth axis address macro call. Masks a seventh axis address macro call. Does not mask a seventh axis address macro call. Masks an eighth axis address macro call. Does not mask an eighth axis address macro call.
NOTE When compilation parameter bit 4 of No. 9005 (AXCLS) is set to 1, MA1 masks O9031, MA2 masks O9032, MA3 masks O9033, and so on. Bit No. Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
9011
MTC = 1 : Masks a T code execution macro call. = 0 : Does not mask a T code execution macro call.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 211
#0 MTC
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM
N
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM
The FANUC Super CAP T is produced by the custom macros and macro executor. The FANUC standard conversational automatic function is also realized by the custom macros. This specification describes the way of compiling the macros and linking and loading the Super CAP T system software into a flash rom module in NC system.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 212
B–66102E/10
N.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM
APPENDIX
Before the system installation, please install a memory card adapter in your personal computer. (1) Installing the FANUC MACRO Compiler System Software Install the the FANUC MACRO compiler system software as follows. 1. Insert the disk marked FANUC MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM v3.1 into the appropriate disk drive. 2. Enter the following command and follow the on–screen instructions: ?: MSETUP (example: B:\MSETUP B: C: ) ?: :The root directory of disk drive.
:Specify the name of the disk drive. :Specify the drive name of the hard disk to install the software.
The following directories are created once the installation is complete. \MCOMP
\TOOL \MEX \USR
\TOOL: The FANUC MACRO Compiler system software, batch document files,and so forth are stored. \SAMPLE \MEX : Executor directory \USR : User directory
This specification assumes as follows. B drive : 5 inch floppy disk C drive : hard disk (2) Path Setting Installed software tools are in \MCOMP\TOOL directory. So modify your ”AUTOEXEC.BAT” file to contain the following DOS command entry. example) PATH=C:\MCOMP\TOOL (3) Installing the Macro Executor File Copy the macro executor file from the disk marked MACRO LIBRAY (16TB SCAP) 1/3 to 3/3 *In explanation, ”BH0F” is the series and ”_01” is version for example. Executor files consists of three files, BH0F_01. EX1 BH0F_01. EX2 BH0F_01. EX3 COPY B:BH0F_01. EX1 C:\MCOMP\MEX COPY B:BH0F_01. EX2 C:\MCOMP\MEX COPY B:BH0F_01. EX3 C:\MCOMP\MEX
(4) Installing the Macro Source File. Copy the macro source file from the disk maked MACRO LIBRAY. COPY B:*.SRC C:\MCOMP\USR
*.SRC: Macro source file
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 213
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
N.2 COMPILING
Command MCOMP0 file–spec (*1) (*1) file–spec : Specify a macro program source. (example) MCOMP0
BH0F_01
The following files are created once the compiling is complete normally. BH0F_01.REL Relocatable file BH0F_01.REF Reference file BH0F_01.LST List file MCOMP0 CAPS_01
The following files are created once the compiling is complete normally. CAPS_01.REL Relocatable file CAPS_01.REF Reference file CAPS_01.LST List file
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 214
B–66102E/10
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM
APPENDIX
N.3 LINKING
(1) Specifying the File to Link (example) BH0F.LNK CNC = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX1 CNC2 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX2 CNC3 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX3 /: P9000 = 10100000 P9001 = 10000001 P9002 = 11000000 P9003 = 10001001 P9007 = 01000000 P9033 = 97 P9037 = 7 P9044 = 2044 /: FILE = \MCOMP\USR\BH0F_01 FILE = \MCOMP\USR\CAPS_01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . /:
Executor file
Compile parameter
Relocatable file (Compiled macro sourceis specified.)
This link file ’BH0F.LNK’ realizes a standard macro function. In case that new macro source is created, add the file name to this link file. (2) Execution of linking Command MLINK file–spec (*3) (*3) file–spec :Specify a link file. (example) MLINK BH0F
The following files are created once the linking is complete normally. BH0F.ROM BH0F.MAP
Rom file Map file
If a link error occurs, the error message is displayed and the linking is aborted.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 215
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM
APPENDIX
B–66102E/10
N.4 WRITE TO THE MEMORY CARD
(1) Execution of MMCARD Convert the rom file to memory card file. Command MMCARD file–spec (*4) (*4) file–spec :Specify a rom file. (example) MMCARD BH0F
The following files are created once the ”MMCARD” command is complete normally. BH0F.MEM
Memory card file
(2) Write to Memory Card Write the memory card file ”BH0F.MEM” to a memory card with memory card adapter. For writing, refer to your memory card adapter’s manual. NOTE To write the Super CAP T system software, a 4MByte size card is needed. Both S–RAM type card and F–ROM type card can be used.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 216
B–66102E/10
N.5 LOADING TO FLASH ROM MODULE
APPENDIX
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM
According to as follows, load the Super CAP T system software into a flash rom module in NC system. 1. Insert the memory card into the main boad of NC system. 2. Turn on the power with pushing the both softkey key of F10(second on the right) and F11(most right) 3. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select ”1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING”. 4. Select ”BH0F.MEM”. 5. Loading to flash rom starts. Select ”END” when the loading is complete. 6. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select ”9.END”.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete 217
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
B–66102E/10
[A] Alarms, 159, 172
[F] Features, 2
[B] Boot Slot Configuration Screen, 124 Boot System (for Series 15–B/15i–A), 173 Boot System (for Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B), 97
Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21), 153 Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21), 152 Free Area in Flash Memory (Series 20), 120 Functions, 13
BOOT SYSTEM (For Series 16i/18i/21i), 122
[G] [C]
GP–IB Interface Setting (for Sereis 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A), 34
CAP Control Module, 87 Compile Error Code Table, 53
[H]
Compile Parameters, 203, 210 Compile/Link Example, 57
How to View Reference List/Compile List, 36
Compiler Series, 11 Compiling, 214 Conversion of Table Data with the Macro Linker (Mlink), 83 Conversion to a Memory Card Format (MMCARD) (This Function is Used in the Series 15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21–B/16 i–A/18i–A /21i–A.), 26 Creating Link Files, 92, 95 Creating Programs, 91, 94
[I] Installing the Executor File from the FANUC MACRO Library Floppy Disk, 9 Installing the System from the FANUC MACRO Compiler System Floppy Disk, 7 Introduction, 80 IPL Menu, 161
Creating Programs by Using Super Cap II M/Super Cap II T with Series 16i/18i, 84 Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II M, 94 Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II T, 91
[L] Link Control File, 83 Link List File, 83 Linking, 215 Load Basic System Function, 139
[D] Determining the Cause of the No–space State, 120 Developing a User Module, 88 Development Environment, 86
Loading End Menu, 164 Loading End Screen, 149 Loading Menu, 163 Loading Screen, 148 Loading Start Menu, 163 Loading Start Screen, 147
[E]
Loading to Flash ROM Module, 217
End of Boot System, 114 Equipment Configuration, 5 Error Messages and Required Actions, 115, 140 Executing the User Program, 89
[M] Macro Compiler (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15i), 14
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] i–1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
Macro Converter (MCONV), 81 Macro Converter (MCONV) Operation Guide for the FANUC Series 16/18 Super Cap M/Super Cap II M, 79
B–66102E/10
Registering a ROM–format File, Stored on a ROM Cassette, into F–ROM, 184 Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module, 89
Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules, 88
Restrictions Imposed on the System, 90
Macro Linker (MLINK), 17
Rom Write/Verification Parameter Table, 56
Macro Program Input, 24
ROM–Format File Transmitter (CNC) (For Series 16/18/20/21T–A), 21
Macro Program Output, 24 Memory Card File Delete Screen, 112, 137 Memory Card Format Function, 113, 138 Memory Card Specifications and Restrictions, 175 Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory, 167
ROM–Format File Transmitter (FANUC FA Writer, GP–IB Interface) (for Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A), 25 ROM–Format File Transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/ FANUC FA Writer) (for Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A), 23 RS–232–C Interface Setting, 33
Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory, 166
[S] [N]
Saving a Mem–format File from F–ROM to a Memory Card, 182
Name of Macro Library, 188
Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure, 125
Notes, 155, 168
Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV), 12 Serial Interface Utility, 24
[O]
Series 15i Compile Parameters, 192
Operation, 81
Setting a Macro Password (Series 20), 118
Operation and Corresponding Screens, 100
Setting a Password, 119
Overview, 123
Source File, 81 Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System, 119
[P] P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A), 143 P–code Loader Function (for Series 20), 160 Parameter, 156, 169
Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP), 12 Specifying Environment Variables, 12 SRAM Data Backup Screen, 110, 134 Starting the Boot System, 98, 123, 176 Starting the P-code Loader Function, 145
Parameters, 191 Parameters Other than Series 15i, 203
Super CAP T/Super CAP II T Loading to Flash ROM, 212
Password, 118
Symbolic Macro Program, 27
Path Setting, 10
System Common Symbol Definition (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF), 39
Processing by P–code Loader Function, 145 Processing Flow for the P–code Loader Function, 162
System Common Symbol Definition File, 35 System Data Check Screen, 104, 129 System Data Delete Screen, 106, 131
[R] RAM Initialization Screen, 146 RAM Initializing Menu, 162 Registering a Mem–format File, Stored on a Memory Card, into F–rom, 178
System Data Loading Screen, 101, 126 System Data Save Screen, 108 System File and User File, 99 System Files and User Files, 124 System Installation (Setup), 6, 213
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] i–2 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
B–66102E/10
[U] [T]
User Modules, 88
Table Conversion List File, 82 Table Data File, 82 Transferring the User Module to F–ROM, 89 Types of Files in F–ROM, 187
[W] Write to the Memory Card, 216
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] i–3 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Jul., 1995
Jan., 1995
Mar., 1994
Mar., 1993
Jul., 1991
Date
05
04
03
02
01
Edition
Addition of Series 20.
Addition of Series 18.
Addition of Series 16–B.
Contents
• Addition of APPENDIX 10 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT WITH MEMORY CARDS (SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION only for Series 21–TB).
• Addition of Series 21–TB
• Correction of errors.
• Addition of APPENDIX 11 BOOT SYSTEM (For Series 15–B).
• Addition of Series 21–MB.
Edition
06
07
08
09
10
Date
Jan., 1997
Jul., 1997
Sep., 1999
Jul., 2000
Jul., 2001
Contents
Addition of Series 16/18/160/180–MODEL C.
Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL A
Addition of Series 15i–MODEL A
Addition of Series 0i–MODEL A
Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL B
FANUC MACRO COMPILER(For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B–66102E)
Revision Record
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
FANUC LTD
Printed in Japan
www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
